Issued to Bid 11/12/2019 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

KALLEN & LEMELSON, LLP

CONSULTING ENGINEERS MECHANICAL ▪ ELECTRICAL ▪ PLUMBING ▪ FIRE PROTECTION

520 EIGHTH AVENUE, 17TH FLOOR, NEW YORK, NY 10018 TEL: (212) 643-9898 | FAX: (212) 643-2332 E-MAIL: [email protected] WEB SITE: WWW.KLENGINEERS.COM

METROPOLITAN HOSPITAL CENTER PRE-CONNECTIONS FOR CRITICAL SYSTEMS PROJECT DHSES PROJECT NO: HMGP 404 - 4085 - 0075

Issued to Bid 11/12/2019

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Prepared By:

Issued to Bid 11/12/2019 Metropolitan Hospital Center

Quick Connects for Electric and Chiller Services

K&L Project № 6375

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section 02 22 22 – Excavation

Section 02 22 23 - Backfill

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

Section 03 21 00 – Steel Concrete Reinforcement

Section 03 30 01 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 03 73 30 – Concrete Repair Work

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 – METALS

Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel

Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07 60 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal

Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping

Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants

DIVISION 09 – Finishes

Section 09 22 16 – Non-structural Metal Framing

Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

Section 09 51 00 – Acoustical Ceiling

Section 09 91 00 – Painting

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

Section 23 05 12 - General Provisions for HVAC Work

Section 23 05 23 - Valves for HVAC

Section 23 05 80 – HVAC Specialties

Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing

Section 23 07 00 - Insulation for HVAC Work

Section 23 20 00 - Piping for HVAC

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 12 – Common Work Results for Electrical

Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables




TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2

Section 26 05 23 - Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables

Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 44 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling

Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 72 - Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study

Section 26 05 73 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study

Section 26 05 74 - Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study

Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards

Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards

Section 26 28 13 - Fuses

Section 26 28 16 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

Section 26 32 14 – Temporary Generator Docking Ports

Section 26 36 00 – Transfer Switches

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Issued to Bid 11/12/2019 Metropolitan Hospital Center Quick Connects for Electric and Chiller Services


SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK 01 31 46 -

SECTION 01 31 46 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK

TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE № PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 1 1.02 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................. 1 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS ....................................................................................................... 2 1.04 INTENT ........................................................................................................................................ 2 1.05 DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................................. 3 1.06 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 3 1.07 VISITING THE SITE ................................................................................................................... 3 1.08 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS .............................................................................................. 3 1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 5 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................ 7 1.11 LAWS, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES ......................................................................... 7 1.12 INDEMNIFICATION ................................................................................................................... 7 1.13 ORGANIZATION OF WORK ..................................................................................................... 8 1.14 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ........................................................................... 9 1.15 TEMPORARY OPENINGS ......................................................................................................... 9 1.16 SHUTDOWNS ............................................................................................................................. 9 1.17 ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION ............................................................... 10 1.18 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING ................................................................................. 10 1.19 BASES AND SUPPORTS .......................................................................................................... 10 1.20 SLEEVES, PIPE AND CONDUIT INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS .................................. 10 1.21 ESCUTCHEONS ........................................................................................................................ 12 1.22 MANUFACTURERS' IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................ 12 1.23 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES .................................................................................................. 12 1.24 TAGS AND CHARTS ................................................................................................................ 12 1.25 IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 13 1.26 COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS .. 14 1.27 TOOLS ........................................................................................................................................ 15 1.28 QUIET OPERATION ................................................................................................................. 15 1.29 RUBBISH REMOVAL............................................................................................................... 15 1.30 CLEANING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................................ 15 1.31 DELIVERY OF MATERIAL ..................................................................................................... 15 1.32 CUTTING AND PATCHING (IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION) ......................................... 16 1.33 ALTERATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 16 1.34 PAINTING .................................................................................................................................. 17 1.35 LUBRICATION ......................................................................................................................... 18 1.36 TESTS ......................................................................................................................................... 19 1.37 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................ 19 1.38 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ......................................................................... 20 1.39 GUARANTEE ............................................................................................................................ 21 1.40 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION ................................................................................ 21 1.41 SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL SITE VISITS FOR OBSERVATION ........................................... 21

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) ...................................................................................................... 22 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 22

3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... 22 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS




PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Where items of the General Conditions are repeated in this Section of the Specifications, it is intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them; it is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated herein.

C. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors and Subcontractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning and Electrical Sections of the Specifications.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. "The Contractor" or "Each Contractor" means specifically, the Contractor or Subcontractor working under his respective Section (Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning or Electrical) of this Specification.

B. "Provide" means to supply, erect, install, and connect up in complete readiness for regular operation, the particular work referred to.

C. "Furnish" means to supply and deliver to the job.

D. "Piping" includes, in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories related to such piping.

E. "Concealed" means hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, or embedded in construction.

F. "Exposed" means "not concealed" as defined above. Work in trenches, crawl spaces, and tunnels shall be considered "exposed" unless otherwise specifically noted. Work located in mechanical rooms, accessible attics, open storage rooms, janitor’s closets, on the roof or anywhere outdoors shall be considered “exposed”.

G. "Approved equal" means any equipment or material which, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, design, performance, physical dimensions, and arrangement to the equipment or material specified, and will function adequately in accordance with the general design.

H. "Governmental" means all municipal, state and federal governmental agencies.

I. Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number (such as "the pump"), such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the Drawings.

J. "HVAC" means Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.




1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. NYC Building Code, NYC Mechanical Code, NYC Energy Conservation Construction Code

B. NYC Fire Code

C. NYC Electric Code

D. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

E. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

F. ANSI American National Standards Institute

G. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

H. AWWA American Water Works Association

I. IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers

J. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

K. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

L. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

M. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

N. UL Underwriters' Laboratories

O. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association

P. ADC Air Diffusion Council

Q. AABC Associated Air Balance Council

R. 1980 National Standard Plumbing Code with all New Jersey State Amendments.

S. Local Water Company Rules and Regulations

T. NFPA-90A Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems

1.04 INTENT

A. It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation. All materials, equipment, and apparatus shall be new and of first-class quality.

B. Any apparatus, appliance, material, or work not shown on Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories, or minor details not shown but necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided without additional expense to the Owner.




1.05 DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment; ducts, conduits, piping, and fixtures.

B. The locations of all items shown on the Drawings or called for in the Specifications that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Architect before being installed. Do not scale Drawings.

C. Follow Drawings in laying out work and check Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. Where headroom and space conditions appear inadequate, Architect shall be notified before proceeding with installation.

D. If directed by the Engineer, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.

E. Piping or ductwork connected to equipment may require different size connection than indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide transition pieces as required at the equipment.

1.06 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Any questions or disagreements arising as to the true intent of this Specification or the Drawings or the kind and quality of work required thereby shall be decided by the Engineer, whose interpretations thereof shall be final, conclusive, and binding on all parties.

B. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, the better quality, greater quantity or more costly work shall be included in the Bid Price and the matter referred to the Engineer’s attention for decision and/or adjustment prior to the Contractor’s submission of their Bid. If such ambiguity is identified by the Contractor during construction (after bid period), then the Engineer shall be consulted merely to decide on the proper technical approach; the more costly work’s value shall be included.

C. Maintain an awareness to avoid space conflict with other trades.

D. Purchase the equipment and material required in accordance with field measurements taken at the proper time during the construction progress.

1.07 VISITING THE SITE

A. Before submitting the final proposal, examine the site of the proposed work to determine the existing conditions that may affect the work, as this Section will be held responsible for any assumptions in regard.

1.08 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All pipe, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

B. Within twenty (20) working days after the acceptance of the proposal, and prior to the submission of any shop drawings for review, a complete list of manufacturers shall be submitted to the




Engineer of all equipment and materials proposed for the work. No reviews will be rendered on shop drawings submitted before the complete list of manufacturers is reviewed.

C. The materials, workmanship, design, and arrangement of all work installed under the Contract shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

D. If material or equipment is installed before the Contractor obtained "No Objections" comment from the Engineer, trade installing same shall be liable for the removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Architect, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

E. The words "or approved equal" are understood to follow: 1. The name of any manufacturer, vendor, equipment or materials; 2. Any trade name, plate number, or catalog number; 3. Any detailed description used to define equipment or material; except where otherwise

indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. 4. It is the intent of these Specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified,

and the terms "other approved" or "or approved equal" are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to the specified item. Consideration will not be given to claim that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction (such as lesser heat exchange surface, etc.) Performance as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance.

F. All equipment and materials required for installation under these Specifications shall be new and without blemish or defect. All electrical equipment shall bear labels attesting to Underwriters' Laboratories approval. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of the material or equipment is indicated, a first class standard article shall be furnished.

G. Where it is proposed to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or of any other part of the mechanical, electrical, or architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore shall, with the review of the Engineer and subsequent comments by the Engineer "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" on the shop drawings, be prepared at no additional cost to the Owner.

H. Where such deviation from contract documents requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring, and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner.

I. All equipment of one type (such as fan, coils, etc.) shall be the product of the same manufacturer.

J. Note that the comments "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" marked on the shop drawings or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements herein before specified does not assure that the Engineer, Architect, or any other Owner's representative attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of equipment. Comments on the shop drawings does not invalidate the Plans and Specifications if the shop drawings are in conflict with the Plans and Specifications.




1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Prior to delivery to job site, but sufficiently in advance of requirements necessary to allow Architect ample time for review, submit copies (as stated in "General Conditions") of shop drawings of all equipment, materials, piping, sleeves, conduit, ductwork, and wiring diagrams, and further obtain written comments "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" for same from the Architect, before installing any of these items.

B. All shop drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD. Manually drafted shop drawings are prohibited. If a Contractor is incapable of developing CAD drawings in-house, then they shall engage the services of an external drafting service in order to do so. The cost for such service shall be borne by the Contractor and included as part of their bid. Shop drawing submittals shall be on paper as described herein. While shop drawings are being developed and revised throughout the construction process, the Contractor shall continually update the CAD files. As construction approaches completion, these shop drawing CAD files will develop into “As-Built” drawings. As part of standard project close-out documents, in addition to providing conventional paper copies of As-Built Shop Drawings, the Contractor must also provide CD’s containing electronic AutoCAD versions of same.

C. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's certified scale drawings, cuts, or catalogs, including descriptive literature and complete certified characteristics of equipment, showing dimensions, capacity, code requirements, motor and drive testing, as indicated on the Drawings or Specifications.

D. Certified performance curves for all pumping and fan equipment shall be submitted for review.

E. Shop drawings submitted with insufficient information shall be rejected without review.

F. All shop drawings and submittals shall be sent via email in PDF format. Other electronic file formats will be rejected without review. Additionally, large format prints (larger than 18” x 24”) shall also be sent in paper (hard copy) form, either mailed or hand delivered. If and where such hard copies are sent, the Contractor shall send a sufficient quantity of prints of each, knowing that one (1) copy will each be required for the Engineer’s record, the Engineer, the Owner and various subcontractors.

G. Samples of materials or equipment, when requested by the Engineer, shall be submitted for review.

H. Provide a detailed Transmittal with all shop drawings, via email. Any Transmittal, Shop drawing, sample, specification, etc. which is not labeled with all of the following information shall be rejected without review: 1. Project name 2. Project location 3. Contractor's name and address, Subcontractor's name and address 4. Applicable section and article number of specifications 5. Contractor's approval stamp and signature 6. Submission number 7. Specific service for which material is to be used.




I. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which review is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.

J. Shop drawings indicating an unsuitable manufacturer shall be rejected without review.

K. The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare piping shop drawings at ⅜"=1'-0" scale and submit to the Engineer for their approval to prepare the coordination drawings as called for in paragraph 1.14. Piping shop drawings shall be drawn with double line piping and shall indicate the elevation above finished floor of all pipes, location and height of building structure (beams, etc.), lengths of fabrication pieces and fittings. Show new and existing work.

L. The comments "No Exception" or "Exceptions as Noted" rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, said review does not in any way relieve responsibility, or necessity, of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

M. "EXCEPTIONS, AS NOTED" means, unless otherwise noted on the drawings to approved for construction, fabrication and/or manufacture subject the provision that the work shall be carried out in compliance with all annotations and/or corrections indicated on the shop drawings and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If also marked "RESUBMIT", "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" is invalid and a corrected submittal of the drawing is required.

N. If a shop drawing is resubmitted and does not comply with all of the comments indicated on the previous submission(s), and does not reflect specific reasons for such non-compliance, it shall be rejected without review.

O. Label resubmitted shop drawings with a stamp indicating the submittal number, for example: SECOND SUBMISSION; THIRD SUBMISSION, etc. and send separate transmittals for each item being submitted so that one transmittal does not cover more than one specific item or group of items from one manufacturer.

P. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle an extension of Contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

Q. Prior to submission of shop drawings, thoroughly check each shop drawing, reject those not conforming to the Specifications, and indicate (by signature) that the shop drawings submitted meet Contract requirements. Deviations and/or exceptions to the contract documents should be clearly noted as being deviations and/or exceptions. The Contractor will later be required to correct such deviation and/or exceptions at his own expense, if they have not been noted and approved on the shop drawing.

R. All shop drawings showing routing of ductwork, piping and conduit, shall be not less than ⅜" = 1'-0" scale.

S. Incorporate a numbering system to help keep track of shop drawing submittals as follows: 1. H .................................................................................................... HVAC shop drawings 2. E ................................................................................................. Electrical shop drawings

T. Concurrent numbers shall follow the prefix letter. Example: H-1, H-2, etc. In addition, shop drawings requiring resubmission should bear the number of the original submission and bear a suffix as follows: H-1A (second submission), H-1B (third submission), etc.




U. Before request for acceptance and final payment for the work, write a letter to the Architect stating that all shop drawings are brought to a condition "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted". Any outstanding shop drawings must be cleared with the Engineer.

1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall furnish, coordinate, produce and distribute record drawings as stated within the General Conditions of the Contract.

B. During construction keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown on the Drawings and that which is actually installed.

C. On certain projects where Record Drawings must be on Mylar, secure from the Architect, a complete set of Drawings and note thereon all changes. Make a complete record of all changes and revisions in the original design which exist in the complete work. Furnishing of these transparencies and preparing these Record Drawings shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. When all revisions showing the work as finally installed are made, the corrected Mylar transparencies shall be submitted for review by the Engineer. After review of the Record Drawings by the Engineer, provide the Owner with one set of black-line prints and Mylar transparencies, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Where record drawings are CAD type, provide CD’s containing AutoCAD files of these drawings to the Architect, the Engineer and the Owner.

1.11 LAWS, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES

A. Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all governmental taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with the work; file all necessary plans, prepare all documents, and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required Certificates of Inspection for the work and deliver to the Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. File for and obtain all required equipment use permits, controlled inspections and all other required filings.

B. Include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, (in addition to Contract Drawings and Documents) in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

C. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association, with all requirements of local utility companies, with the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction, and with the requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction.

D. Include in the bid, without extra cost to the Owner, retaining the service of a licensed professional engineer to obtain equipment use permits, testing of all fire and fire smoke dampers, and approvals and all other required filings.

1.12 INDEMNIFICATION

A. Pay all royalties and defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof.




B. If process or article specified is an infringement of a patent, promptly notify the Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work specified knowing it to be an infringement of patent, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.

C. Take out all necessary insurance, free of extra charge, and agree to indemnify and save harmless the party contracting for services against loss or expense, by reason of the liability imposed by law upon such party for damages because of bodily injuries, including death at any time resulting therefrom, accidentally sustained by any person or persons or on account of damage to property arising out of or in consequence of the performance of this Contract, whether such injuries to persons or damage to property are due or claimed to be due to any negligence in the performance of the Contract, the party contracting for services, employees or agents, or any other person.

1.13 ORGANIZATION OF WORK

A. The work throughout shall be executed in the best and most thorough manner under the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Engineers, Owners and Architects, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the Drawings and Specifications, and shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in their judgment, are not in full accordance therewith.

B. The work called for under this Contract shall be carried on simultaneously with the work of other trades in a manner such as not to delay the overall progress of the work. Furnish promptly to other trades involved at the project, all information and measurements relating to the work which they may require. Cooperate with them in order to secure the harmony necessary in the interest of the project as a whole.

C. Furnish and install all work as fast as possible to meet all construction schedules.

D. Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Such superintendent shall be replaced if unsatisfactory to the Owner.

E. Upon award of contract, consult with the Engineer and negotiate with subcontractors and manufacturers and submit five (5) copies of a preliminary list of major equipment, for approval, complete with name of manufacturer, dates of purchase orders, and delivery dates to the site. Also submit five (5) copies of a preliminary schedule of installation of the various systems. This list shall be revised monthly and five (5) copies shall be submitted. The second submittal shall contain the names of manufacturers of scheduled equipment (with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local representatives).

F. Maintain a complete file of shop drawings at all times available to the Owner's representative.

G. Every facility shall be provided to permit inspection of the work by the Owner's representative during the course of construction.

H. Where items of equipment and/or materials are indicated in the Specifications as being furnished by other trades for installation, assume responsibility for the unloading of such equipment and/or materials from the delivery trucks, and for providing safe storage for same as required pending installation.




I. Where the work is to be installed in close proximity to work of other trades, or where there is evidence that the work is to interfere with work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.

J. If so directed by the Engineer, prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than ⅜" = 1'-0" clearly showing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the installation is made before coordinating with other trades, make all necessary changes in the work without extra charge to the Owner.

K. Before submitting shop drawings for sleeves, piping and ductwork, the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall prepare a combined ⅜" = 1'-0" scale shop drawing for piping and ductwork indicating location of piping and ductwork with dimensions for each floor and Mechanical Rooms. A digital copy of these shop drawings shall be given to the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall indicate the location of all lighting fixtures and conduit runs on these shop drawings. The Electrical Contractor shall give the transparent copy of these shop drawings, with lighting fixtures and conduit runs indicated to the General Sub-Contractor for coordination of GC work. Each Contractor and Sub-Contractor shall keep each digital copy not more than three (3) working days.

L. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Sub-Contractor shall arrange a Coordination Meeting for each floor and Equipment Room with the General Sub-Contractor and the Electrical Contractor. After coordination, each Contractor shall sign the transparent copy. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Sub-Contractor shall submit these drawings to the Engineer for review and he shall call any conflicts that could not be resolved in the coordination meetings, and/or deviation from original design, to the Engineer’s attention. After receiving written review from the Engineer, each Contractor shall prepare the shop drawings as required under the paragraph "Shop Drawings" in the Specifications.

1.14 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A. Maintain and protect all equipment, materials and tools from loss or damage from all causes until final acceptance by the Owner.

B. Assume responsibility for the protection of any finished work or other trades from damage or defacement by the operations and remedy any such injury or damages.

1.15 TEMPORARY OPENINGS

A. Ascertain from examination of the Architectural Drawings whether any special temporary openings in the building will be required for the admission of apparatus provided under the Contract and notify the Architect accordingly. Assume all costs of providing such openings.

1.16 SHUTDOWNS

A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such regular time or at overtime when designated by the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Owner shall be notified of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed.




C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance, including overtime, when approved by the Owner, if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections.

1.17 ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION

A. Install all work so that all parts required are readily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of magnitude shall not be made without prior written review from the Architect.

B. Wherever mechanisms requiring access for maintenance, reading of instruments, or for operation are concealed in the structure and wherever else indicated on the Drawings, supply access doors of sizes necessary to provide ready access to the concealed items. Group together valves, controls, dampers, traps, expansion joints, cleanouts, gauges, switches, and other equipment requiring access in walls and furred spaces to reduce the number of access doors.

1.18 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING

A. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of all equipment and materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, and remove same from premises when no longer required.

B. In the event that supplementary bracing of the basic building structure is required to assure a secure rigging procedure and a secure route for the equipment being handled, assume full responsibility for such supplementary bracing.

1.19 BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide all bases and supports not part of the building structure of required size, type and strength, as approved by the Engineer, for all equipment and materials furnished by him. All equipment, bases, and supports shall be adequately anchored to the building structure to prevent shifting of position under operating conditions.

B. Concrete bases are specified under other Sections of the Specification. Each Contractor shall furnish dimensioned drawings to the General Sub-Contractor. Steel dowels, sleeves and anchor bolts shall be furnished and set.

C. New concrete pads shall be doweled into the existing concrete with ½" rods at corners, drilled 6" deep and grouted. An epoxy bonding agent shall be applied between the old and new concrete. Concrete shall be 3000 psi reinforced with one middle layer 4 x 4 - w2.9 x w2.9.

1.20 SLEEVES, PIPE AND CONDUIT INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide and assume responsibility for the location and maintenance in proper position of all sleeves, inserts, and anchor bolts required for the work. In the event that failure to do so requires cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done without additional cost to the Owner.

B. All pipes and conduits passing through all partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation enclosing the pipe or conduit. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe.




C. Sleeves through concrete floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, set flush with finished wall surfaces, but extending 1" above finished floors. The open sleeve space shall be packed with non-combustible materials.

D. Sleeves through non-masonry partitions shall be 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel, set flush with finished surfaces of partitions.

E. The Contractor shall have the option of providing 18 gauge sheet metal sleeves in lieu of Schedule 40 steel pipe.

F. Inserts shall be preset concrete inserts with steel reinforced rods through the insert and both ends hooked over the reinforced mesh. Inserts shall be of individual type of malleable iron construction with accommodation for removable nuts and threaded rods up to ¾" diameter, permitting lateral adjustment, except as otherwise noted. Individual inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 279 up to 5" pipe and conduit, Fig. 282, 6" and up to 8" pipe and conduit, Fig. 152 above 8" and up to 12" pipe and conduit. For figures 282 and 152, they shall come with an opening at the tip to allow reinforcing rods up to ½" diameter to be passed through the insert body. Rods shall extend a minimum of 4" on either side of the insert. Pipes larger than 12" shall be suspended from steel members only.

G. All piping and conduit shall be supported from structural steel building members only. All loads shall be hung from steel building members. Add supplementary steel tied into the structure members as needed. Support such piping, conduits and ductwork from supplementary steel.

H. Piping and conduit 3" and smaller may be supported from existing concrete slabs by "Phillips" ¾ expansion bolts with lead shields. Knee angle with ¾" expansion bolt in shear and supporting rod at 90̊ from another bolt or using two expansion bolts per hanging post - pipes 8' and larger shall be supported from steel building members.

I. Provide sleeves for pipes passing through roofs. Sleeves passing through roofs shall be as detailed on drawings extending min. 12" above finished roof. All pipes passing through roof shall be minimum of 10" from walls or other construction to permit proper flashing. Provide counter flashing.

J. Where sleeves pass through waterproofed floors, they shall be IPS brass pipe sleeves of the required diameter, brazed at the bottom to 18" x 18", 16-ounce copper flashing for bond with waterproofing. The tops of the sleeves shall extend 1" above finished floor.

K. No ductwork, piping, conduit or equipment shall be supported from corrugated decking construction. For this area provide supplementary steel to support ductwork, piping, conduit or equipment. Supplemental steel members shall be welded to building structural steel.

L. All hangers, rods and supports shall be installed prior to construction fireproofing.

M. The required fire resistance rating of floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and walls shall be maintained where a penetration is made for electrical, mechanical, plumbing pipes, conduits, ducts and systems. Fire stopping shall be provided at openings around vents, pipes, ducts, conduits at floor levels and walls with non-combustible materials. For openings around pipes and conduits and/or sleeves, 3M product Caulk CP 25 and Putty 303 or approved equal shall be provided.




N. Owner shall retain the services of a NYS Licensed Professional Engineer and under his direction shall inspect the existing spray or fire proofing of existing structural members exposed during the renovation and slab penetration. Provide a report of deficiencies.

1.21 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide escutcheons on pipes wherever they pass through ceilings, walls, or partitions.

B. Escutcheons or pipes passing through outside walls shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 1, solid, cast brass, flat type secured to pipe with set screw.

C. Escutcheons for pipes passing through floors shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 36A, split-hinged, cast brass type, designed to fit pipe on one end and cover sleeve projecting through floor on the other end.

D. Escutcheons for pipes passing through interior walls, partitions, and ceilings shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 3A, split-hinged, cast brass chromium plated type.

1.22 MANUFACTURERS' IDENTIFICATION

A. Manufacturer's nameplate, name or trademark, shall be permanently affixed to all equipment and material furnished under this Specification. Where such equipment is in a finished occupied space, the nameplate shall be in a concealed but accessible location. The nameplate of a Subcontractor or Distributor will not be acceptable.

1.23 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Provide for each item of equipment, including panelboards, disconnects, breakers, starters, switches, and all control devices, pumps, fans, compressors, boilers, etc., a permanently attached nameplate made of black surface, white core laminated bakelite with incised letters. Subcontractor furnishing equipment shall provide nameplate. Pneumatic, electric and mechanically actuated gauges shall have a brief, but complete description of their function. Stating the air pressure or voltage range alone is not acceptable. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 3" long by 1½" wide and shall bear the equipment name and item number (tag number) in ½" high white letters as designated in the equipment schedule. Nameplates shall be attached to their respective equipment by screws or rivets.

1.24 TAGS AND CHARTS

A. Furnish and attach to each valve as hereinafter specified, a 1½" diameter brass tag with ½" indented numerals filled with durable black compound. Tags shall be securely attached to stems of valves with wire and "S" hooks.

B. Valve charts shall consist of schematic drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing the function. Also furnish three (3) copies of schematic flow chart with corresponding valve numbers noted on chart.

C. Provide tags for the following valves: 1. Zone control, bypass, shut-off, check and balancing valves. 2. Building and area shut-off and balancing valves.




3. Control, by-pass, shut-off, balancing and drain valves for major pieces of equipment such as boilers, domestic hot water heaters, heat exchangers, refrigeration machines, pumps, heating, ventilating and air conditioning units, cooling towers, etc.

4. System drain valves, safety and relief valves. Vacuum breakers.

1.25 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification shall be in accordance with "Scheme for Identification of Piping System ANSI A13.1" and OSHA safety color regulation.

B. Markers shall be snap-on type as manufactured by Craftmark, Fort Worth, TX or Seton Nameplate Corp., New Haven, CT (Setmark System), or Bunting Stamp Co. Inc., Pittsburgh, PA or approved equal. Markers shall completely encircle the pipe with a substantial overlap. No adhesive shall be used. They shall be manufactured of U.L. approved, self-extinguishing plastic. When the pipe, including insulation (if any), is larger than 4 inches diameter, markers shall be strap-on type. For piping located outdoors, all markers shall be strap-on type for all pipe diameters. Markers for medical gas piping shall be by means of metal tags, stenciling, stamping or with adhesive markers, in a manner which is not readily removable.

C. Provide identification for piping and conduit for electrical work.

D. All piping shall be labeled, whether concealed above ceilings or exposed. Labels shall be installed at intervals no greater than 15 feet (unless noted otherwise) and shall be installed after every turn or elbow. Where concealed above ceilings, a minimum of one (1) label shall occur above each room. Due to various above ceiling visual obstructions, the Engineer reserves the right to request additional labels in order to ensure visibility, at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Pipe shall be lettered and valves tagged in accordance with the schedule below. Lettering shall be located near each valve and branch connection and at intervals of not over 20 feet (10 feet on fire lines, and at least once in each room and in each story traversed for medical gas piping*) on straight runs of pipe. Provide flow arrows for all piping at each marker. Adjacent to the legend, stencil the size of the pipe, conduit or ductwork. Letter Colors are as follows: Yellow with black letters, green with white letters, blue with white letters and red with white letters.

*Required by NYC Code RS 16 P114.12

LABEL AND VALVE TAG SCHEDULE

Service LabelDesignation Color Tag

Designation

Condenser Water Supply Condenser Water Green C.W.S.

Condenser Water Return Condenser Water Ret. Green C.W.R.

Chilled Water Supply Chilled Water Green CHWS

Chilled Water Ret. Chilled Water Return Green CHWR

F. Tanks, pumps, fans and other equipment shall be labeled to show the number, if any, and service.




G. Exposed conduits for alarm and communication systems shall be banded at intervals of not over 10 feet. Bands shall be of the following colors: 1. Fire Alarm System ................................................................................................... Red 2. Waterflow and Sprinkler Supervisory System ........................................ Red & Yellow 3. Combined Fire Alarm and Watchmen's Report System .............................. Red & Blue 4. Watchmen's Report System .................................................................................... Blue 5. Security System ..................................................................................... Blue & Yellow 6. Civil Defense System .......................................................................................... Yellow 7. Clock System ........................................................................................................ Green 8. Mechanical & Electrical Supervisory System ......................................... Green & Blue 9. Telephone System ................................................................................ Green & Yellow

H. Except where other means of identification are specified, electric cabinets, switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, system control boards, disconnecting switches, remote control switches, individual motor starters and motor control pushbutton stations shall be stenciled to show the service and number, if any, of the equipment controlled, as appropriate. Panelboards and other electrical equipment located in finished areas, such as offices, shall have the identification placed on the inside of the cabinet doors.

I. Cabinets housing 460Y/265 Volt panelboards shall have "460/265 volt" stenciled in 2-inch high yellow letters on the inside of the cabinet doors.

J. Cabinet housing emergency lighting panelboards shall have the word "EMERGENCY" stenciled in 2-inch high red letters on the outside of the cabinet, in addition to other lettering required above.

K. The bolted covers of housings for disconnecting switches or links in bus ducts between network transformers and switchboards shall be lettered to identify the equipment within.

L. Serial numbers shall be stenciled on the tanks and covers of transformers having their nameplates attached to the high voltage switch chamber covers.

M. Signs for Equipment Controlled through the BAS: For all fans, pumps and other motor driven equipment with start/stop control through the BAS provide a red surface, white core laminated bakelite sign with incised letters, permanently mounted on the equipment indicating, “Warning. This Equipment Is Started and Stopped Automatically from the Building Automation System.”

1.26 COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

A. The space equal to the width and depth plus 6” on either side of the electrical equipment and extending to a height of 6 feet above the equipment or the structural ceiling, whichever is lower, shall be dedicated to the electrical installation and shall not contain piping ducts or other equipment foreign to the electrical installation. Electrical equipment shall include switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers.

B. Examine the drawings and site existing conditions, and in cooperation with the Electrical Work confirm the final location of all electrical equipment to be installed in the vicinity of piping and ductwork. Plan and arrange electrical equipment locations and new pipe locations so that all overhead piping is no closer than three feet, and ductwork no closer than one foot from a vertical line to electric switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers or similar equipment.




C. Where the installation of piping and ductwork does not comply with the requirements of foregoing paragraphs, where feasible, the piping and ductwork shall be relocated. Installation of a barrier between piping and ductwork and electrical equipment below will be considered if located more than six feet above the electrical equipment. Refer to NEC Article 110.

1.27 TOOLS

A. All special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be delivered to the Owner's representative and a receipt requested for same at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.28 QUIET OPERATION

A. All equipment and material shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which in the opinion of the Architect is objectionable. Where sound or vibration conditions arise which are considered objectionable by the Architect, eliminate same in a manner reviewed by the Architect.

1.29 RUBBISH REMOVAL

A. See to it that the project is at all times maintained free of all rubbish, rubble, waste material, packaging materials, etc. accumulating as a result of his work. Assume responsibility for the cleaning up of packaging removed from materials and equipment furnished by other trades for the installation. Note that final acceptance of the work is contingent upon the project being free of all excess and waste materials resulting from the work.

B. Clean all parts of the building exterior spaces and adjacent roads, sidewalks, and pavement, free from material and debris resulting from the execution of the work. Debris resulting from interior construction shall be neatly stacked on each floor near elevators, material hoists and rubbish chutes, as directed by the Architect or his representative. Debris resulting from exterior construction shall be similarly stacked. All debris so stacked will be removed under other Sections. Excess material will not be permitted to accumulate either on the interior, exterior or on sidewalk.

1.30 CLEANING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Clean all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation.

B. If any part of a system should be stopped by foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. During construction, properly cap all pipes and equipment nozzles so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc.

1.31 DELIVERY OF MATERIAL

A. Deliver the material and store same in spaces indicated by the Architect and assume full responsibility for damage to structure caused by any overloading of the material.




1.32 CUTTING AND PATCHING (IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION)

A. All cutting and patching shall be done under another Section. Furnish the sizes and locations of all chases and openings required for the installation for his work before the walls, floors and partitions are built.

B. As a general rule, chases, shafts and wall openings as shown on the Drawings will be provided for most of the ducts and pipings, but promptly arrange with the Construction Supervisor for additional openings should any be required for the work.

C. Provide the labor and materials for all work included under the Contract or Subcontract in ample time and sufficient quantities so that all of the work of the Contract or Subcontract may be installed in proper sequence to avoid unnecessary cutting of the floors and walls.

D. Any cutting and patching required due to the failure to comply with the above provisions, shall be done at no extra cost to Owner. Such cutting and patching shall be done under Division One, as approved by the Architect.

E. Where existing piping or ductwork insulation are damaged by the requirements of the work, replace all damaged insulation to match existing.

F. Refer to Paragraph: "Sleeves, Inserts and Anchor Bolts" for additional requirements.

G. Prior to performing any core drilling or cutting of existing floor or roof slabs, Contractor shall perform a scan of the slab using ground penetrating radar (GPR) to confirm that there are no existing conduits or pipes in area of core drill or cutting of slab.

1.33 ALTERATIONS

A. When new work and alterations render equipment, piping and ductwork useless, such equipment, piping and ductwork when exposed to view, shall be removed and connections thereof to lines or ducts remaining shall be properly capped or plugged and left in construction. If construction, such as hung ceiling, furred beam, chase, etc., is opened up and removed during the course of the construction, the useless pipe and ducts therein shall be treated as though exposed to view. When required to accommodate new work, useless piping and ductwork concealed in construction shall be treated as though exposed to view.

B. When existing piping and duct systems, at points of connection to new work or in rerouting are found defective, such defective portions shall be removed and replaced with new materials without cost to the Owner.

C. Provide temporary supports where required.

D. Where alterations reveal piping, ductwork, conduit circuits, wiring, and accessories that must necessarily remain in service, same shall be rerouted, replaced or altered as required to make same completely concealed in the new work at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Where existing piping or ductwork insulation is damaged by the requirements of the work, replace all damaged insulation to match existing.




F. Cutting in existing building shall be done by each Contractor as reviewed by the Architect. Rough patching shall be done by each Contractor. Finish patching, ceiling construction removal, new ceiling in existing building will be done under another Section.

1.34 PAINTING

A. Painting Schedule 1. No on-site painting is required on the following items unless specifically indicated

otherwise: a. Stainless steel or monel sheet metal. b. Stainless steel or monel piping. c. Piping or ductwork to be insulated. d. Insulation on piping or ductwork in unfinished spaces or concealed. e. Insulated piping covered with stainless steel, aluminum or all service jacketing,

unless otherwise specified. f. Insulated piping in walk-in and non-walk-in tunnels. g. Mechanical equipment with a factory applied baked-on enamel finish, not specified

to be insulated or provided with an enameled steel insulated jacket. h. Insulated equipment or smoke stacks specified or noted on the Drawings to be

covered with stainless steel or aluminum sheet metal jacketing. i. Factory fabricated multi-wall metal smoke flue piping. j. Concealed piping.

2. Paint the following: a. Uninsulated Black Steel Piping:

1) Exposed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel.

2) Exposed in Unfinished Rooms, or Unfinished Spaces, or in Pipe Shafts: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of finish.

3) Exposed Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel.

b. Uninsulated Galvanized, Cast Iron, Brass or Copper Piping: 1) Exposed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats

of latex semi-gloss enamel. 2) Exposed Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of exterior acrylic

latex gloss enamel. 3) Exposed in Unfinished Rooms or Unfinished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 2

coats of finish. c. Piping in floor trenches after fabrication: primer and finish. d. Uninsulated Mechanical Equipment:

1) Furnished with a Factory Applied Prime Coat Finish: 2 coats of acrylic latex semi-gloss enamel. No primer required.

e. Vessels, Tanks, and Like Equipment Specified to be Insulated: l coat of corrosion resistant paint, prior to the application of insulation.

f. Uninsulated Exposed Iron and Steel Surfaces of Boilers, Including the Steel Casing, Buck Stays, Boiler Fronts, Castings, Smoke Pipes, Breeching and the Exposed Surfaces of all Other Iron or Steel Installed in Conjunction with Boiler Work: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of heat resistant enamel.

g. Hangers, Supports and Accessories: 1) Exposed: Paint to match adjacent piping, pipe insulation or ductwork

insulation.




2) All black steel or iron pipe hangers, rods, inserts, brackets and accessories for supporting piping systems and duct systems: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel. Paint black steel hanger rods, threaded on the job site, with a primer immediately after installation.

3) Metal Fabrications in Finished Spaces: Paint over shop coat with 2 coats of alkyd gloss enamel.

h. Uninsulated Exposed Valves, Flanges, Unions and Irregular Surfaces in Piping Systems Installed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 1 coat of black heat resistant enamel.

i. Convector enclosures shall be painted at the factory as specified in Section 15835: Convectors.

j. Underground pipe, ducts and conduits - two coats of black asphaltum paint.

B. Color Coding: 1. Apply finish paints of colors indicated opposite the various items listed below where such

items are installed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Machine Rooms, Boiler Rooms, Penthouse Mechanical Equipment Rooms:

2. Piping, Exposed - Bare and Insulated on Unfinished Spaces and Rooms: a. Fuel Oils ...................................................................................................... Yellow b. Pneumatic Tube Systems ............................................................................... Green c. Steam Supply (all pressures) ....................................................................... Yellow d. Steam Condensate Returns .......................................................................... Orange e. Water - Boiler Make Up ....................................................................... Light Green f. Water - Boiler Feed ..................................................................................... Orange g. Water - Blow Off ......................................................................................... Orange

3. Piping Not Listed Above: Color code by classification as follows: a. Fire Protection .................................................................................................. Red b. Dangerous Materials ................................................................... Yellow or Orange c. Safe Materials ................................................................................................ Green d. Valuable Materials ....................................................................................... Purple

4. Equipment - Bare and Insulated (Except Factory Painted): Grey.

C. The inside of all ductwork where visible through openings shall be painted with two prime coats of flat black paint.

D. Nameplates on all equipment shall be cleaned and left free of paint. Where equipment is to be painted, the Contractor shall carefully mask of all equipment nameplates and data tags prior to application of paint. Such masking shall be removed after paint has dried.

E. All lead bends and lead safes and flashing shall be painted with two coats of waterproof black asphaltum varnish.

1.35 LUBRICATION

A. Assume responsibility that all rotating equipment is properly lubricated as soon as it is connected by the Electrical Subcontractor before operation of this equipment is started. Assume responsibility for any damage to any equipment that is turned on without previously having been oiled or greased when connected up.




1.36 TESTS

A. All piping, wiring, and equipment shall be tested as specified under the various sections of the work. Labor, materials, instruments and power required for testing shall be furnished under the particular Section of the Specifications.

B. Tests shall be performed satisfaction of the Architect. The Architect will be present at such test, when he deems necessary and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction.

C. Pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of equipment and installation of insulation. In no case shall piping, equipment, or accessories be subjected to pressure exceeding their rating.

D. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the review of the Architect.

E. Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Architect.

F. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all authorities having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the time prescribed in each Section of the Specifications.

G. Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during the appropriate season. Tests shall be performed on individual equipment, systems, and their controls. Whenever the equipment or system under test is interrelated with and depends upon the operation of other equipment, systems and controls for proper operation, functioning, and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system being tested.

H. The electrical work shall include providing any assistance (such as removal of switchboard and panelboard trims and covers, pull and junction box covers, etc.) deemed necessary by the Architect to check compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.37 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Two months prior to the completion of all work and the final inspection of the installation by the Owner, five (5) copies of a complete Instruction Manual, bound in booklet form and suitably indexed, shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. All written material contained in the manual shall be typewritten or printed.

B. The Manual shall contain the following items:

Table of Contents (HVAC and Electrical)

I. Introduction - Explanation of Manual and its use.

II. Description of Systems

1. Complete schematic drawings of all systems. 2. Functional and sequential description of all systems. 3. Relationship of system where applicable to the supervisory data system.




III. Systems Operation

1. Start-up procedures. 2. Shut-down procedures. 3. Reset and adjustment and balancing procedures. 4. Seasonal operation. 5. All posted instruction charts.

IV. Maintenance

1. Cleaning and replacement - lines, components, filters, strainers, ducts,

fans, etc. 2. Lubrication. 3. Charging and filling. 4. Purging and draining. 5. Systems trouble shooting charts. 6. Instruments checking and calibration. 7. Procedures for checking out functions with remote (Supervisory Data

Console) indication and control. 8. Recommended list of spare parts.

V. Listing of Manufacturers

VI. Manufacturer's Data (Where multiple model, type and size listings are included,

clearly and conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation).

1. Description - Literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts, technical data, etc.

2. Operation. 3. Maintenance - including complete trouble-shooting charts. 4. Parts List. 5. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local recommended repair

and service companies. 6. Guarantee data. 7. Model No. and Serial No. of all equipment.

1.38 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. After completion of all work and all tests and at such time as designated by the Engineer, provide the necessary skilled personnel to operate the entire installation for a period of two (2) consecutive days eight (8) hours each.

B. During the operating period, fully instruct the Owner's representative in the complete operation, adjustment and maintenance of the entire installation.

C. Provide training on the operation and maintenance for equipment, as indicated within the equipment specification. If not indicated within the equipment specification section, provide the following training: 1. Temporary Chiller Installation: One (1) day. 2. Automatic Temperature Controls: Two (2) non-consecutive days within one (1) year of

the Owner's acceptance. 3. Temporary Generator Installation: Four (4) non-consecutive days.




1.39 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor guarantees by his acceptance of the Contract that all work installed will be free from any and all defects and that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified, and that if during a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of work, one (1) entire heating and cooling season or eighteen (18) months from date of shipment, whichever is later, any such defects in workmanship, material or performance. He shall immediately replace, repair, or otherwise correct the defect or deficiency, including parts, labor and travel time, without cost to the Owner within a reasonable time. Notify the Architect in writing of the time required to do work. For heating systems the guarantee period must include one continuous heating season from November 1st to April 1st. For cooling systems the guarantee period must include one continuous cooling season from May 1st to October 1st.

B. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner any and all damage done to the building or its contents or to the work of other trades in consequence of work performed in fulfilling guarantee.

C. This Article is general in nature and will not waive stipulations of other claims which specify guarantee periods in excess of one (1) year.

D. In the event default on this Guarantee, the Owner may have such work done as required & charge the cost to the Contractor.

E. The date of acceptance shall be the date of final payment by the Owner or notice of acceptance by the Owner, whichever is later.

1.40 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION

A. The Owner may require operation of parts or all of the installation for the beneficial occupancy prior to final completion and acceptance of the building.

B. The operation shall not be construed to mean acceptance of the work by the Engineer for the Owner. The Owner will furnish supervisory personnel to direct operation of the entire system and the Contractor shall continue to assume this responsibility until final acceptance.

1.41 SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL SITE VISITS FOR OBSERVATION

A. As the project approaches completion, the Engineer and Architect, at their discretion shall determine a period of time in which they shall perform a Semi-Final Site Visit to observe the Mechanical and Electrical installation. At the conclusion of this Semi-Final Site Visit, a Semi-Final Punchlist shall be issued to the appropriate Contractor for the deficiencies in the work of his trade. Complete all work and perform all corrective measures as required by the Semi-Final Punchlist. After this corrective and completion work has been accomplished, in writing, advise the Architect and the Engineer that every item on the Semi-Final Punchlist has been completed. After the Architect and Engineer make a Final Site Visit to observe the Mechanical and Electrical installation and make a Punchlist, a similar letter of Compliance shall be forwarded through the appropriate channels.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of all equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Installation/Operation & Maintenance Manuals and instructions. If other requirements of this Specification contradict what is stated in the Manufacturer’s instructions, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineer for clarification. Any and all of the Manufacturer’s requirements for utilities (electrical power and control wiring, piped water, drain, gas, fuel oil, steam, condensate, etc.), ducted supply or exhaust air, mounting and support shall be provided by the Contractor, regardless of how, or whether or not stated elsewhere in the Contract/Bid Documents.

END OF SECTION 01 31 46



EXCAVATION 02 22 22-1

SECTION 02 22 22

EXCAVATION 1PART - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Excavation for building foundations.

B. Excavation for slabs-on-grade, paving and landscaping.

C. Excavation for site structures.

D. Site excavation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02 22 23 - Backfilling

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Do not excavate wet or frozen materials without written approval from the Engineer.

B. Provide safety barricades around open excavations. 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. 1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under the requirements of Division 1.

B. Coordinate excavation with installation of sheeting. 2PART - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 3PART - EXECUTION




3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.

B. Identify known underground, above ground and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations.

C. Notify utility company to remove or relocate utilities, if required.

D. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

E. Protect plant life, lawns and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

F. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

G. Notify the Engineer prior to commencement of excavation.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Underpin adjacent structures that may be damaged by excavation work, including utilities and pipe chases.

B. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving,

drainage or sanitary structures, sidewalks, landscaping and construction operations to the limits as indicated on the plans.

C. Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less, until shored.

D. Excavation cut not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

E. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into

excavation.

F. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock.

H. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work.

I. Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost to Owner in accordance with Section 02 22 23 – Backfilling.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform field inspection and testing to confirm the soil bearing capacity of 1.5 tsf minimum.

B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.




3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect work under the requirements of Division 1.

B. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.

C. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.




BACKFILLING 02 22 23-1

SECTION 02 22 23

BACKFILLING

1PART - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Building perimeter and site structure backfilling to sub-grade elevations.

B. Site filling and backfilling.

C. Consolidation and compaction.

D. Fill for over-excavation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02 22 22 - Excavation.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

B. ANSI/ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures using 10 lb. Rammer and 18-inch Drop.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under the requirements of Division 1.

B. Test Reports: Submit sieve analysis for each type fill to be used.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Type A - Coarse Stone: Angular, washed natural stone; free of shale, clay, friable material, sand, debris; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing




2-inch 100% 1-inch 95% 3/4-inch 75 - 90% 5/8-inch 35 - 60% 3/8-inch 15 - 35% No. 4 < 5%

B. Type B - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136, to the following:

1. Minimum Size: 1/4-inch.

2. Maximum Size: 5/8-inch.

C. Type C - Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed, free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, or organic matter; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136, within the following limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing No. 4 100% No. 14 10 – 100% No. 50 5 – 90% No. 100 4 – 30% No. 200 0 – 1%

D. Type D - Subsoil: Reused, excavated material, graded, free of lumps, rocks and gravel larger than 3 inches in size, debris and contaminants.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions and substrate.

B. Verify fill materials to be reused are acceptable.

C. Verify items to be buried during backfilling process have been inspected prior to backfilling.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Compact sub-grade to 95 percent maximum dry density in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557.




B. Cut out soft areas of sub-grade not capable of in situ compaction. Backfill with Type C fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy materials.

C. Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) compacted density.

D. All backfilled materials shall be compacted to 95 percent maximum dry density in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557. Maintain optimum moisture content to attain required density.

E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage structures or other items against which material is backfilled.

F. Backfill against supported structures. Do not backfill against unsupported structures.

G. Backfill simultaneously on each side of structure.

H. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.

I. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

J. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

K. Remove temporary sheeting, as backfilling progresses, under provisions of Section 022222.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Variation From Top Surface of General Backfilling: 1 inch.


A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Supplemental General Requirements.




B. Perform field tests and analysis of fill material in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557.

C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

D. Unless additional testing is required by the Engineer, compaction tests shall be taken at the following rates:

1. Concrete Structures: One test per 5 vertical feet of structure.

2. Pavement Subgrade: One test per 500 square feet of subgrade immediately prior to placing subbase.

3. Concrete Flatwork and Pavers: One test per 400 square feet of flatwork.

4. Curbing: One test per 100 linear feet.




STEEL CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00-1

SECTION 03 21 00

STEEL CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 01. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Except as shown or specified otherwise, the Work of this Section shall conform to the

applicable requirements of the following: 1. Specifications for Structural Concrete, ACI 301-99 of the American Concrete

Institute. 2. Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-1-01 of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel

Institute. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Placing drawings for bar reinforcement. B. Samples: 1. Bar Supports: Full size. 2. Fabric Reinforcement: 4 inches square, each wire size. 3. Fabric Reinforcement Supports: 3’-0” long pieces. 4. Reed Clips: 2’-6” long pieces. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Affidavit required under Quality Assurance Article. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: Affidavit by the bar reinforcement manufacturer certifying that bar

material meets the contract requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel bars. B. Fabric Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, fabricated into flat sheets

unless otherwise indicated. C. Bar Supports; Either of the Following Types: 1. Galvanized steel or AISI Type 430 stainless steel, and without plastic tips.



STEEL CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00-2

D. Fabric Reinforcement Supports: 1. Uni Zag by Universal Form Clamp, 840 South 25th Avenue, Bellwood, IL

60104, (800)728-1958. 2. Continuous Support, “CS” by Dayton Superior, 721 Richard Street,

Miamisburg, OH 45342, (800) 745-3700. E. Tie Wire: Black annealed wire, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING A. ACI 301, Section 3.3 Execution: 1. Replace the first sentence in paragraph 3.3.2.1 Tolerances- with the following: Place, support, and fasten reinforcement as shown on the project drawing or

approved shop submittal. 2. Add the following paragraphs: 3.3.2.1.a At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free of loose rust

and loose mill scale. 3.3.2.4.j Bar Reinforcement: In rectangular panels of two-way construction,

place the steel in the short direction first with the longer bars on top in the opposite direction.

3.3.2.5.a Fabric Reinforcement: Offset end laps in adjacent sheets to prevent

continuous joints at ends of sheets. Support of Fabric Reinforcement, provide Fabric Reinforcement

Supports tied to fabric at 18 inches o.c. and spaced at 36-inch intervals. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Unless other reinforcing is shown on the Drawings, reinforce the following items of

concrete as indicated below: 1. Concrete Slabs on Grade: 4 x 4 - W2.0 x W2.0 welded wire fabric. 2. Concrete Floor Fills Greater than 2-1/2 Inches Thick: 4 x 4 – W2.0 x W2.0

welded wire fabric.

END OF SECTION



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01-1

SECTION 03 30 01

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. Except as shown or specified otherwise, the Work of this Section shall conform to the

requirements of Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 301-16 of the American Concrete Institute.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Package: Submit product data for design mix(es) and materials for concrete

specified below at the same time as a package. B. Shop Drawings: Placing drawings for bar reinforcement. C. Product Data: 1. Concrete design mix(es) with name and location of batching plant. 2. Portland Cement: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 3. Fly Ash: Name and location of source, and DOT test numbers. 4. Air-entraining Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 5. Water-reducing Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 6. Aggregates: Name and location of source, and DOT test numbers. 7. Lightweight Coarse Aggregate: Brand and manufacturer’s name 8. Chemical Hardener (Dustproofing): Brand and manufacturer’s name, and

application instructions. 9. Chemical Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Brand and manufacturer’s

name, and application instructions. 10. Bonding Agent (Adhesive): Brand and manufacturer’s name, and preparation and

application instructions. 11. Expansion Joint Filler: Brand and manufacturer’s name. D. Samples: 1. Fabric Reinforcement: 4 inches square. 2. Bar Supports: Full size. E. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Affidavit required under Quality Assurance Article. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE




A. Concrete batching plant shall be currently approved as a concrete supplier by the New

York City Health and Hospital Corporation. B. Fly ash supplier shall be currently approved as a fly ash supplier by the New York City

Health and Hospital Corporation. C. Certifications: Affidavit by the bar reinforcement manufacturer certifying that bar

material meets the contract requirements. D. Source Quality Control: The Director reserves the right to inspect and approve the

following items, at his own discretion, either with his own forces or with a designated inspection agency:

1. Batching and mixing facilities and equipment. 2. Sources of materials. 1.04 STORAGE A. Store materials so as to insure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the Work.

Materials, even though accepted prior to storage, are subject to inspection and shall meet the requirements of the Contract before their use in the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 4, for Normal Weight Concrete): A. Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, and on the New York City Health

and Hospital Corporation's current “Approved List”. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, including Table 1A (except for footnote A), Class F except that

loss on ignition shall not exceed 4.0 percent. C. Chemical Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: ASTM C-309, Type 1D, Class B, with a

minimum 18 percent total solids content. No thinning of material allowed. 1. SureCure Emulsion, Kaufman Products, Inc. 3811 Curtis Avenue, Baltimore,

MD 21226, (800) 637-6372. 2. Cure & Seal by Symons Corp., 200 East Touhy Ave., PO Box 5018, Des Plaines,

IL 60017-5018, (847) 298-3200. 3. “Kure N Seal W” by Sonneborn/ BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Dr.,

Shakopee, MN 55379, (800) 433-9517. 4. Day-Chem Cure & Seal 26 percent (J-22) by Dayton Superior Corp., 721

Richard St., Miamisburg, OH 45342, (800) 745-3700. 5. Acrylseal HS by Master Builders/ BASF Building Systems, 23700 Chagrin

Blvd., Cleveland, OH 44122, (800) 628-9990. D. Chemical Hardener (Dustproofing): Colorless aqueous solution of magnesium-zinc

fluosilicate. Approved products include:




1. Lapidolith by Sonneborn/ BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Dr., Shakopee, MN 55379, (800) 433-9517.

2. Surfhard by The Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, OH 44110, (216) 531-9222.

3. Pena-Lith by W.R. Meadows, Inc., PO Box 543, Elgin, IL 60121, (847) 683-4500.

4. FluoHard by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., 14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152, (402) 453-6600.

5. Armortop by Anti Hydro International, Inc., 265 Badger Ave., Newark, NJ 07108, (800) 777-1773.

6. Diamond by Kaufman Products, Inc., 3811 Curtis Avenue, Baltimore, MD 21226, (800) 637-6372.

E. Type 1 Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed, resilient, non-extruding cork units; ASTM D

1752, Type II. F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC or rubber; one inch chamfer. G. Epoxy Bonding Agent (Adhesive): 100 percent solids epoxy-resin-base bonding

compound, complying with ASTM C 881, Types I, II, IV and V, Grade 2 (horizontal areas) or Grade 3 (overhead/vertical areas), and Class B (40-60 degrees Fahrenheit) or Class C (60 degree Fahrenheit and above).

1. Sikadur Hi-Mod 32 by Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Avenue, Lyndhurst, NJ

07071, (800) 933-7452. 2. Epogrip by Sonneborn/ BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive,

Shakopee, MN 55379, (800) 433-9517. 3. SurePoxy HM Series by Kaufman Products, Inc., 3811 Curtis Avenue,

Baltimore, MD 21226, (800) 637-6372. 2.02 PROPORTIONING (Amendments to ACI 301, Sections 4 & 7): A. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi. 1. Minimum 4000 psi for slabs, and exterior slabs.. B. Weight: Normal weight concrete C. Durability: Concrete shall be air-entrained. Design air content shall be 6 percent by

volume, with an allowable tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent for total air content. Entrained air shall be provided by use of an approved air-entraining admixture. Air-entrained cement shall not be used.

D. Slump: 1. 4000 psi Normal Weight Concrete: Between 2 inches and 3 inches. E. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures in concrete unless specified or approved in writing

by the Director.




F. Selection of Proportions: Concrete proportions shall be established on the basis of previous field experience or laboratory trial batches, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Director. Proportion mix with a minimum cement content of 611 pounds per cubic yard for 4000 psi concrete.

1. Optional Material: Fly ash may be substituted for (Portland) cement in normal weight concrete up to a maximum of 15 percent by weight of the required minimum (Portland) cement. If fly ash is incorporated in a concrete design mix, make necessary adjustments to the design mix to compensate for the use of fly ash as a partial replacement for (Portland) cement.

a. Adjustments shall include the required increase in air-entraining admixture to provide the specified air content.

b. Lower early strength of the concrete shall be considered in deciding when to remove formwork.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 3): A. Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel bars. B. Fabric Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, fabricated into flat sheets

unless otherwise indicated. C. Bar Supports: Galvanized steel or AISI Type 430 stainless steel, and without plastic tips. D. Tie Wire: Black annealed wire, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. 2.04 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.6): A. Obtain bond at construction joints by the use of bonding agent (adhesive) or the use of

cement grout. 2.05 PRODUCTION (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 5): A. Provide ready-mixed concrete, either central-mixed or truck-mixed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not use items of aluminum for mixing, chuting, conveying, forming or finishing

concrete, except magnesium alloy tools may be used for finishing. B. Keep excavations free of water. Do not deposit concrete in water. C. Hardened concrete, reinforcement, forms, and earth which will be in contact with fresh

concrete shall be free from frost at the time of concrete placement.




D. Prior to placement of concrete, remove all hardened concrete spillage and foreign materials from the space to be occupied by the concrete.

3.02 FORMWORK (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 2): A. Chamfer all exposed external corners of concrete. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 3): A. At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free of mud, oil, loose rust, loose

mill scale, and other materials or coatings that may adversely affect or reduce the bond. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 5): A. Operation of truck mixers and agitators and discharge limitations shall conform to the

requirements of ASTM C 94. B. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 feet. 3.05 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 5.3.3): A. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes

below: 1. Rough Form Finish for concrete surfaces not exposed to view. 2. Smooth Form Finish for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 3.06 FINISHING SLABS (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 5.3.4): A. Slabs On Grade: Provide key type joints unless otherwise shown. Tool exposed joints. B. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes

below: 1. Floated Finish for: a. Treads and platforms of exterior steps and stairs. b. Slabs and fill over which waterproofing, roofing, vapor barrier,

insulation, terrazzo, or resin bound flooring is required 3. Broom or Belt Finish for: a. Exterior slabs. Texture, as approved by the Director’s Representative. C. Finishing, General: Provide monolithic finishes on concrete floors and slabs without the

addition of mortar or other filler material. Finish surfaces in true planes, true to line, with particular care taken during screeding to maintain an excess of concrete in front of the screed so as to prevent low spots. Screed and darby concrete to true planes while plastic and before free water rises to the surface. Do not perform finishing operations during the time free water (bleeding) is on the surface.

3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 5.3.6):




A. Maintain concrete surfaces in a moist condition for at least 7 days after placing, except where otherwise indicated. Do not use curing compound.

3.08 CHEMICAL HARDENER (DUSTPROOFING) A. Apply chemical hardener to all troweled finished interior floors which are to be left

exposed. B. Do not apply chemical hardener until concrete has cured the number of days

recommended in manufacturer’s instructions. C. Prepare surfaces and apply chemical hardener in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions and recommendations. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Amendments to ACI 301, Section 1): A. Make available to the Director’s Representatives whatever test samples are required to

make tests. Furnish shipping boxes for compression test cylinders.

END OF SECTION

Issue To Bid 11/12/2019 Metropolitan Hospital Center Electric and Chiller Quick Connects


CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 03 73 30 - 1

SECTION 03 73 30 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and service s to provide for the structural repair of concrete membe rs with manufactured structural repair concrete/mortar as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. Work in cludes removing spalled concrete and cleaning of exposed s teel reinforcement, and repair of concrete surfaces afte r installation of equipment supports.


A. Cast In Place Concrete Formwork.........Section 03 20 00

B. Steel Concrete Reinforcement............Section 03 30 01 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

References and industry standards listed in this Se ction are applicable to the Work. Unless more restrictive cr iteria or differing requirements are explicitly stated in the Specifications, or mandated by governing codes or r egulations, the recommendations, suggestions, and requirements described in the referenced standards shall be deemed mandatory and applicable to the Work.

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

B. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

1. "Hand Tool Cleaning - SP2"

2. "Power Tool Cleaning - SP3"

C. International Concrete Restoration Institute (I CRI)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

Provide manufacturer's information on the structura l repair concrete/mortar, including application instructions and specifications.

B. Quality Control Submittals

1. Certificates:




a. Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed Specification requirements.

b. Manufacturer’s training certificate: Furnish

letter from manufacturer stating personnel performing work have been instructed on the proper usage of the material.

2. Repair Procedure: Furnish written description o f

repair procedures and operations sequencing based on manufacturer's requirements prior to commencing the Work.

3. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit field repo rt

from manufacturer of repair mortar indicating areas of surface preparation and mortar placement inspected.

4. Contractor Qualifications

Provide proof of Installer and Manufacturer qualifications specified under “Quality Assurance”.

5. Mock-up: Provide mock-ups as indicated under

Quality Assurance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications

1. Installer: Company specializing in the Work of this Section shall have a minimum of three years experience and at least two projects with similar quantity of materials. Contractor shall be trained by the repair mortar manufacturer and shall have a certificate of training on file from the manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the

manufacture of concrete repair mortars to be used in this Contract shall have a minimum of ten years experience.

B. Manufacturer's Representative

All work of this Section shall be performed under t he overall supervision of the repair material manufact urer's representative. The representative shall attend pr e-construction meetings to instruct the contractor on the proper usage of the material and to make regular vi sits during the course of construction to ensure that su rface preparation and method of installation is acceptabl e.




C. Job Mockups

Prior to performing the work of this Section, prepa re a sample panel of not less than 12 sq. ft. of concret e repair work, including a separate mock-up of the su rface preparation. For formed repairs, provide mockup of pour to ensure that material will be properly vibrated a nd finish will be without voids. Do not proceed furth er with the work until the Authority’s representative has approved the sample panel. Sample shall be a porti on of the area to be restored and may be kept if approved .

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Materials specified shall be delivered to the si te in sealed, properly labeled containers. Containers sh all indicate manufacturer's name, trade name of product , lot number, shelf life of product, and mix ratio (if applicable).

B. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. Comply

with manufacturer's printed instructions for storin g and protecting materials.

C. Do not store liquid material in hot sun. Keep m aterial

from freezing. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply if the temperature is below 50 oF or above 85 oF unless the material manufacturer is consulted for recommendations.

B. Do not use frozen materials or materials coated with ice

or frost.

C. Do not apply when there is expectation of rain w ithin 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sto Concrete Restoration Div., Atlanta, GA 30331

B. Sika Corp, Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 C. Strongwall Industries, Ridgewood, NJ 07451




2.02 MATERIALS

A. Structural Repair Concrete - Non-formed/overhead Application

1. Shall have non-shrink characteristics and be of

high compressive and bond strength. Material shall be non-sag, capable of being troweled in place for vertical and overhead applications without the need of formwork and conform to the following properties:

a. Compressive strength of 5000 psi in 28 days

when tested in accordance with ASTM C109.

b. Bond strength of 2000 psi in 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C882 (modified). Results of tests showing failure of base material is acceptable alternative.

c. Flexural strength of 1300 psi in 28 days when

tested in accordance with ASTM C78 or ASTM C293.

d. Maximum linear length change shall be 0.080%

when tested in accordance with ASTM C157 (dry cure).

e. Modulus of elasticity shall be between 3.0 and

3.5 x 10 6 when tested in accordance with ASTM C469.

2. Repair concrete/mortar shall be "CR702 Sto Overh ead

Mortar" as manufactured by Sto Concrete Restoration Division, "Sikatop 123 Plus" as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or "SW-88" as manufactured by Strongwall Industries.

B. Structural Repair Concrete/Mortar - Horizontal

Application

1. Shall have non-shrink characteristics and be of high compressive and bond strength. Material shall be capable of being poured or troweled in place for horizontal applications and for formed applications of sufficient dimensions to allow for proper placement of material and conform to the following properties:



b. Bond strength of 2000 psi in 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C882 modified).




Results of tests showing failure of base material is acceptable alternative.



d. Maximum linear length change shall be maximum

of 0.08% at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C157.



2. Repair concrete/mortar shall be "CR701 Sto Trowel-

Grade Mortar" as manufactured by Sto Concrete Restoration Division, "Sikatop 122 Plus" as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or "SW-81/SW-81F" as manufactured by Strongwall Industries.

C. Structural Repair Concrete/Mortar - Formed Appli cation

1. Shall have non-shrink characteristics and be of

high compressive and bond strength. Material shall be flowable, capable of being poured in formed repairs of small dimensions without forming voids and conform to the following properties:



b. Bond strength of 2000 psi in 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C882 modified). Results of tests showing failure of base material is acceptable alternative.



d. Maximum linear length change shall be maximum

of 0.08% at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C157.






2. Repair concrete/mortar shall be "CR745 Sto Flowa ble Mortar" as manufactured by Sto Concrete Restoration Division, "Sikatop 111 Plus" as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or "SW-81F" as manufactured by Strongwall Industries.

E. Miscellaneous Materials

1. Water: Potable water, ASTM C94

2. J hooks: 1/4" diameter threaded rod, Type 316

stainless steel

2. Epoxy paste adhesive: ASTM C882 4. Coarse aggregate: Clean, washed crushed stone ,

3/8" maximum size, conforming to ASTM C33. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine all adjoining work on which this Work is in anyway dependent for proper installation and workma nship. Report to the Authority any conditions that preven t the performance of this Work.

B. The Contractor shall determine the most suitabl e material

indicated in Part 2 of this Specification to be use d for each application to achieve the most structural sou nd repair with appropriate finish, unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. As an example, the Cont ractor may decide to form an application on a vertical sur face in lieu of using the overhead repair mortar. The contractor shall include in the repair work procedu re what materials will be used where and how the repai r will be achieved for both the structural integrity of th e patch and the correct finish.

3.02 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION

A. Protection

Protect adjacent surfaces not to be restored. Prot ect sills, ledges, and projections from material droppi ngs.

B. Surface Preparation

1. Remove spalled and weak concrete and remove all

loose and foreign material. Chip substrate by bush hammering or other mechanical means acceptable to the repair concrete/mortar manufacturer to obtain a minimum aggregate-fractured surface profile of 1/8+” conforming to an ICRI CSP 7 or greater




surface preparation. Minimum depth of repair shall be 1/2", with the perimeter of the repair having a minimum of 1/8" in depth. Feather edging is not permitted.

2. If steel reinforcing is exposed, chip out behind

the reinforcing steel. Chip a minimum of 1/2" behind the bar and 3" past the point where the bar is exposed. Concrete behind bars shall be removed enough to allow for the entire circumference of the bar to be cleaned. Remove concrete to the point past where sound material begins.

3. Exposed steel reinforcement and steel beams shall

be free of all rust, scale, oil, paint, grease, loose mill scale, and all other foreign matter that will prevent bonding with the repair concrete. Use power chipping or power driven brushes and clean to an SSPC-SP2 or SP3 surface preparation.

4. Where additional reinforcement is not shown to be

anchored in and for patches greater than 1 1/ 2" in depth and overhead patches, install stainless steel threaded J hooks set in epoxy paste adhesive. Anchor is to be 3/4" clear minimum from finished face of repair. Hooks are to be embedded a minimum of 3" into concrete, installed diagonally to plane of concrete surface. Holes are to drilled 1/8" larger than rod diameter and shall be cleaned thoroughly. Space hooks at 16" o.c.

3.03 REPAIR CONCRETE/MORTAR APPLICATION

A. Mix structural repair concrete in accordance wit h manufacturer's instruction. Follow time limits set by manufacturer to prevent hardening of material prior to placement. For material requiring extension with aggregate due to depth of repair, provide 3/8" aggr egate of proportions specified by the repair mortar manufacturer.

B. Prior to application of material, thoroughly sat urate

surface with water. Remove any standing water prio r to patching.

C. Apply a scrub coat of the repair material of pro portions

determined by manufacturer (indicate in written rep air procedure). While still damp, apply repair concrete/mortar.

D. Apply material behind and around rebars first to

completely fill void.




E. Overhead/Vertical Repairs - Apply repair concrete/m ortar, non-formed/overhead application, on vertical and ov erhead members with a trowel or other such device, all in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply in lifts of up to 2" or as determined by mate rial manufacturer at a consistency that the material wil l not slump. Follow manufacturer's instructions for scor ing, curing, priming, and approximate time between layer s. Do not leave voids. Trowel exposed surface smooth and to same shape and finish as the adjacent existing surf ace.

F. Formed Repairs

1. Apply repair concrete, horizontal application, on

vertical members where formwork can be utilized to confine the concrete and the width of repair permits its proper installation.

2. Apply flowable repair mortar for repairs to be

formed, especially for thin repairs.

3. Place so as not to leave voids. Vibrate forms with pencil vibrator to removed air bubbles. Remove formwork as soon as possible and trowel exposed surface smooth and to same shape and finish as the adjacent existing surface.

3.05 CURING

A. As soon as surface of patch has hardened, cure p atch a minimum of 48 hours by applying water-based acrylic curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 or C1315, misting, wet burlap, etc. For patches to be covere d with other material, only use curing compounds acceptabl e to the finish material manufacturer, unless the compou nd is removed prior to placing the finish material in a m anner acceptable to the finish manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's latest recommendations for any

other recommendations. The curing provision of A a bove shall not be waved unless manufacturer does not per mit it.

3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Clean all adjacent areas of excess material and clean all floors and walls of powder and droppings. Remove misplaced materials from surfaces immediately.

B. Protect material from freezing and from rainfall prior to

final set. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL




A. The Authority will inspect surfaces and reject a ny that contain cracks or other defects. The repair will b e tested for soundness and structural integrity. Any defective areas shall be fixed at Contractor's expe nse. Notify the Authority’s representative in advance of the concrete repairs. The Authority’s representative w ill review the mixing, surface preparation and proper application of all materials.

B. Engage the services of the material manufacturer 's

representative to inspect the surface preparation, instruct in the proper usage of the material and to inspect the work throughout the project. Pay for a ll required fees.

END OF SECTION



UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 -1

SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS The General Contract Provisions apply to all t he work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipme nt required to perform the work of this Section as shown on the Drawings a nd/or as specified herein.

B. In general, the work shall include, but not nec essarily be limited

to, the following:

1. Build in all frames and sleeves for doors, louve rs, grills, railings, mechanical penetrations, etc., indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate installation for the work.

2. Provide all anchors, bolts, ties, reinforcing, e tc., necessary

to complete the work of this Section and as require d by the New York State Building Code.

3. Build in all wood blocking and grounds. Provide mortar fill

at all metal frames in masonry walls and partitions .

4. Provide new lintel steel above new door openings in all masonry walls.

5. Proper joint details between new and existing ma sonry walls

at joints. 6. Provide concrete unit masonry and other masonry wor k as specified

herein, as shown on the drawings, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. The terms concrete masonry unit (CMU) and concrete block are inter-changeable

C. Related Work of Other Sections:

The Contractor will be required to coordinate the r elated work of other Sections with the work of this Section and be responsible for the timely and expeditious performance of the same.


A. Cast-In-Place Concrete.......................... . Section 03 30 00

B. Masonry Mortaring & Grouting.................... ..Section 04 05 12

C. Metal Fabrications.............................. ..Section 05 50 00 1.4 VERIFYING CONDITIONS

A. Examine all drawings covering work of this Secti on and refer to all other drawings, including all mechanical and electr ical drawings, which may affect the work of this Section or requir e coordination by the same.




B. Report, in writing to the Architect with a copy to the owner, any and all conditions which may interfere with or othe rwise affect or prevent the proper execution and completion of the work of this Section. Do not commence any work until any and all such con ditions have been corrected by the trade or trades responsible.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. B. Submit shop drawings and samples with all details and information

as required for the work of this Section and in acc ordance with the requirements for the same under the General Require ments.

C. Submit test reports for each type of face brick and pavers submitted

to the Architect for acceptance showing compliance with the specifications.

1. Testing and reports shall be certified by an in dependent laboratory

that is accepted by the Architect. 2. Test reports shall show: Compressive strength 2 4 hour cold water

absorption 5 hour boil absorption Saturation coeffi cient Initial rate of absorption (suction)

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Work

1. During erection, cover top of wall with strong wate rproof membrane at the each of day or shutdown.

2. Cover partially covered completed walls when work i s not in progress.

3. Extend cover minimum of 24" down both sides. 4. Hold cover securely in place.

B. Staining

1. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of m asonry to

be left exposed. 2. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such

masonry.

C. Cold Weather Protection

1. If ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch .

2. Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged by the Architect and/or Engineer.

3. When brick suction exceeds specifications sprinkle with heated water. When units are above 0 degrees Centigrade he at water above 21 degrees Centigrade. When units are below 0 degrees Centigrade, heat water above 54 degrees Centigrade.

4. Use dry masonry units. Do not use wet or frozen uni ts. 5. When air temperature is between 4 degrees to 0 degr ees Centigrade,

heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar tempera tures between 4 degrees and 49 degrees Centigrade.

6. When air temperature is between 0 degrees to -4 deg rees Centigrade, heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar tempera tures between 4 degrees and 49 degrees Centigrade. Maintain tempe ratures of mortar on boards above freezing.

7. When air temperature is between -4 degrees to -7 de grees Centigrade,




heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar tempera tures between 4 degrees and 49 degrees Centigrade. Maintain tempe ratures of

8. mortar on boards above freezing. Use heat sources o n both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wi nd is in excess of 15 mph.

9. When air temperature is -7 degrees Centigrade and b elow, heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 4 degrees and 49 degrees Centigrade. Provide enclos ures and auxilliary heat to maintain air temperature above 0 degrees Centigrade. Minimum temperature of units when laid shall be -7 degrees Centigrade.

D. Cold Weather Protection For Completed Masonry

1. When mean daily air temperature is between 4 degree s to 0 degrees

Centigrade, protect masonry from rain or snow for 2 4 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane.

2. When mean daily air temperature is between 0 degree s to -4 degrees Centigrade, completely cover masonry with weather-r esistive membrane for 24 hours.

3. When mean daily air temperature is between -4 degre es to -7 degrees Centigrade, completely cover masonry with i nsulating blankets for 24 hours.

4. When mean daily air temperature is -7 degrees Centi grade and below, maintain masonry temperature above 0 degrees Centigrade for 24 hours by electric heating blankets or other approved methods approved by Architect.

1.7 CLEANING

Remove all rubbish resulting from the installation of the work of this Section. Clean all adjoining surfaces of smudges, dirt or gr ime resulting from the same. Repair and/or replace materials and finishes damaged as a result of this installation.

1.8 GUARANTEE

All work performed under this Section shall be guar anteed as provided under the General Requirements.

1.9 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Users as a Mineral Admixture i n Portland Cement Concrete.

B. ASTM C 311, Standard Methods of Sampling and Testin g Fly Ash and Natural Pozzolan for Users as a Mineral Admixture in Portla nd Cement Concrete.

C. ASTM C 989, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag fo r Use in Concrete Mortars.

D. Standard Practice ACI 226.R1, Ground Granulated Bla st-Furnace Slag as a Cementitious Constituent in Concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Manufacturer shall have been continuously engaged i n the manufacture of brick as specified in the Specifications and Drawin gs for a minimum of ten (10) years. The following manufacturer is acceptab le or equal approved by Architect:

A. Belden Brick Co., Canton, OH 330 456 0031

B. Aggregate for concrete masonry units (CMU)




1. Northeast Solite corporation, Mt. Marion, N.Y. 2. Norlite corporation, Cohoes, N.Y.

2.1 MATERIALS

All materials shall be subject to the approval of t he Architect and shall fulfill the requirements of applicable building cod es, be trademarked and/or grade-marked and shall comply with the following re quirements:

A. Face Brick: Shall conform to ASTM C62/C652, and mat ch the color, texture

and size of the existing face brick on the front el evation with the following characteristics:

1. ASTM: C216-XX 2. Grade:SW 3. Type: FBS 4. Dimensions: Match existing. 5. Minimum Compressive Strength: Match existing. 6. Maximum 24 hr (submersion %) Water Absorption: 5.19 7. Maximum Saturation Coefficient: 0.72 8. Color, texture and physical properties shall match or equal

approved by Architect. 9. Variations in color and texture from specified face brick shall

not be accepted.

B. Brick Paver: N/A

C. Cement: If not otherwise designated, cement shall be gray Portland Cement, or approved brand, complying with ASTM C-15 0 Type I, as used for exposed masonry, only one brand throughout the work.

D. Lime: Shall be pressured hydrated lime as approved , Warner Company

" Super Limoid ", Corson Lime Company "Miracle", o r U.S. Gypsum Company "Mortaseal".

E. Water: Shall be clean and potable.

F. Sand: Shall be siliceous, hard, sharp, well graded, clean and free

from deleterious matter.

G. Subsurface Drainage: N/A

H. Mortar Setting Bed: Shall be Type AM@ as per specif ication Section 04100 Mortar and Grout and shall conform to the pro portion specifications of ASTM C270 color to be selected by Architect.

I. Reinforcing bars for reinforced masonry shall confo rm to ASTM A615-60.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:

A. Types

1. Hollow load-bearing: ASTM C90, Type I. Aggrega te shall conform to ASTM C331.

2. Size: nominal face dimension 8" x 16" or 8"x18", except as noted otherwise.

3. Unit weight: unit weight of concrete for CMU no t to exceed 90 pcf when tested in accordance with ASTM C140 (10 5 pcf for the high strength CMU).

4. Fire ratings: units manufactured with equivalen t solid




thicknesses, face shell thicknesses, web thicknesse s, and other characteristics to obtain fire ratings as indicated on the drawings.

2.3 METAL WALL REINFORCEMENT

A. Metal wall reinforcement shall be adjustable eye-wi re Truss Type #170 fabricated from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82 manufactured by Hohman & Bernard, Inc. with No. 9 gauge cross ro ds but welded not more than 16" o.c. to deformed 9 gauge side rods. F inish shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to ASTM A153 Class B2 . Truss Type #170 shall be installed in every other course of the CMU wall, unless otherwise noted.

B. Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60, def ormed billet steel

bars. 2.4 ANCHORS AND TIES

A. Except as noted, anchors and ties shall be heavi ly galvanized metal of suitable and approved type and gauge for each us e similar but not limited to the following by Hohmann & Barnard:

1. Column Web Tie #302W 2. Vee Wall Tie #VWT 3. Weld-On Tie #359 4. Corrugated Wall Tie #CWT

Eraydo zinc by Hohmann & Bernard shall be used for exterior wall masonry ties.

B. Strap anchors shall be 1-1/4" x 3/16" turned up 2" at ends.

C. Ties of wire, wire mesh, corrugated or crimped s hall be of gauge as

approved for each purpose. Sheet metal ties shall b e not less than No. 22 gauge. Wire mesh shall be not less than No. 16 gauge.

2.5 GENERAL

A. Handling and Storage of Materials: Masonry mate rials shall be carefully handled and properly stored at all times prior to t heir incorporation into the work. Material subject to damage by exposu re to the weather on contact with the ground shall be placed on platf orms in covered, moisture-free storage. Units shall be placed, not dumped, at the point of use. Any material damaged in transit or ha ndling will be subject to rejection.

B. Wetting Bricks: In warm and dry weather, brick shall be damp when

laid, wetted beforehand when required and to the ex tent directed. Concrete Masonry Units shall not be wetted.

C. Freezing Weather: Masonry walls shall be erecte d only when surrounding

temperatures are 40 degree F or above. When it app ears probable that freezing will occur before mortar has set, approved precautionary measures shall be taken.

D. Protection: Protection shall be provided whenev er necessary to prevent

damage to masonry by storms or freezing. Tops of all walls not completed or not protected by subsequent permanent work shall be thoroughly protected with suitable waterproofing covering, wel l secured during period of suspended work. Projections and angles ex posed to damage




shall be boxed or otherwise protected to prevent da mage. 2.6 MORTARS & GROUT

A. Mortar for structural masonry except as noted herei n, shall be Type S, conforming to ASTM C270(Job-mixed proportion spe cifications: NCMA TEK 20, and BIA technical notes 8, 8A, and 8B) and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2000 PSI.

B. Grout for structural masonry shall be fine or coars e as required,

mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi after 28 days unless otherwis e noted on the Drawings.

C. Non-shrink, non-metallic, high strength grout shall be AFive Star

Grout@ by U.S. grout or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Bases on which masonry is to be built shall be s olid, level and made thoroughly cleaned before mortar bed is laid.

B. All masonry shall be built level, plumb and true to line with accurately

spaced courses, bond kept plumb throughout each cou rse, alternating joints with the preceding courses as required. No course shall terminate at a corner or opening with a piece less than half the length of the unit used.

C. At angles and abutments, masonry shall be bonded or, if permitted,

it shall be secured with strap anchors spaced not m ore than 3'-0" apart. Masonry furring at it's abutment with walls shall be secured with approved metal joint reinforcement or corrugat ed metal ties spaced at 2'-0" or less apart.

D. Prior to installing any face brick, the contrac tor must cover the

entire CMU back-up wall with +/- 2@ thick cement pa rge coat. Except as otherwise noted, all brick shall be dampened bef ore laying. Bricks shall be laid with a full level bed of mortar, not furrowed. The joints between each brick shall be slushed full of mortar before the succeeding course is laid. The end of each stretcher and side of header in face work shall be fully buttered as laid, the brick pre ssed against the previously laid brick to form a full, tight joint. The practice of buttering only the corners of the brick and then th rowing mortar or scraping into the open joint will not be permitted. Before laying a brick part thereof to close the space between two other bricks previously laid, fresh mortar shall be applied to the ends of these bricks and to the flat of the closure brick which shall be roc ked into place. Dry or butt joints will not be permitted.

E. Width of cross joints and bed joints shall be un iform, approximately

equal to face work not exceed in 3/8" unless otherw ise noted.

F. All anchors, bolts, plugs, ties, bearing plates, lintels, flashings, etc., shall be built in as the work progresses.

G. The cells of all hollow masonry shall be filled solid around anchors,

under lintels or bearing plates ( to the minimum of three (3) courses or more if required by structural conditions). Fla shing embedded in walls shall be set with a bed of mortar above an d below the horizontal




flanges of the flashing.

H. During the progress of the work, surfaces intend ed to remain exposed shall be kept free of mortar droppings. The joints of furred masonry or masonry receiving dampproofing shall be struck f lush. The joints of brick walls receiving plaster shall be raked out to a depth of at least 1/2".

I. Vertical cells to be filled with grout shall be aligned to provide

a continuous, unobstructed opening of the dimension s shown on the plans.

J. Hollow units shall be laid with full mortar cove rage on horizontal

and vertical face shells except that webs shall als o be bedded where they are adjacent to cells to be reinforced and/or filled with grout.

K. All cutting and fitting of masonry, including th at required to

accommodate the work of other trades, shall be done with masonry saws.

L. Grout for filling reinforced or non-reinforced c ells shall be fluid and placed by acceptable pressure grouting procedur es.

M. Grout for filling reinforced or non-reinforced c ells shall be placed

in maximum four (4) foot lifts and consolidated in place by vibration or other methods which insure complete filling of t he cells. All cells containing reinforcing bars and/or anchor bol ts shall be fully grouted.

N. Points of bearing shall be on two (2) courses of hollow masonry grouted

solid.

0. Chases shall be built into walls, not cut in. C hases shall be plumb and shall be a minimum of one (1) masonry unit leng th from jambs of wall openings. No chases other than those shown on the drawings shall be constructed without prior review of the architec t/engineer.

3.2 BUILT-IN WORK

A. Build in all metal access doors, frames for all windows and louver units.

B. Build in all required wood grounds, nailing bloc ks etc., as furnished

under other Sections.

C. Build in all required metal and fabric flashings as provided under other Sections.

D. Build in all metal wall reinforcement as specifi ed herein.

E. Hollow metal door and other frames shall be secu rely built in, filling

solidly with mortar around all anchors and in all s paces between frames and the masonry, leaving no voids.

F. Set and build in all bearing plates and anchors furnished under Section

05500, Metal Fabrications. Work in close cooperatio n with the Contractor for the same.

G. Build in required units for elevator and/or refu se chute operations.

3.3 EXTERIOR MASONRY WALLS




A. Face brick shall be laid up with courses and joi nting, as specified herein and conforming with the applicable requireme nts stipulated in the preceding paragraph concerning workmanship in general. The face of joints shall be struck off flush and when p artially set, shall be compressed and well tooled to a neatly finished, dense, slightly concave surface. All brick at exterior vertical sur faces shall be face bricks as selected by the Architect.

3.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Install reinforcing bars as shown on the Drawings. Lap bars at least thirty (30) bar diameters as work progresses. Vert ical reinforcing to be continuous from footing to top of wall.

B. Grout reinforcing bars as per Drawings and structur al notes.

3.5 CURING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING

All drilling, cutting and patching of masonry requi red by and in connection with other work and making good after such work has been installed shall be done as required. Other trades shall be consulte d in advance to avoid any unnecessary installation or patching.

3.6 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: (CMU)

A. General

1. Lay blocks with cells vertical. Provide running bond unless shown otherwise on the drawings or as indicated bel ow, bonded at corner angles. Fill cores containing vertical r einforcement with masonry grout for full height, as the wall is erected.

2. Where interior partitions intersect other partit ions or walls,

bond together with metal wall ties spaced 2'-0" O.C . min., vertically. Refer to Article on "Reinforcement".

--- END ---



STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-1

SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Fill for Bollards: Section 03 30 01 1.02 REFERENCES A. Except as shown or specified otherwise, the Work of this Section shall meet the

requirements of the following: 1. Design, Fabrication, and Erection: “Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings, Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design”, June 1, 1989, by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC Specification).

2. Standard Practice: Fabrication and erection practices shall comply with the “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”, June 10, 1992, by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC Code).

3. Welding: Welding shall comply with the provisions of the “Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1”, by the American Welding Society (AWS Code).

4. High-Strength Bolting: High-strength bolting shall comply with the “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation on November 13, 1985 (Specification for Structural Joints).

5. Cleaning Steel: Comply with the appropriate specifications (SSPC SP-X) by the Steel Structures Painting Council.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. AISC Manual: Where reference is made to the AISC Manual, it shall mean the

Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition, of the American Institute of Steel Construction.

1.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONNECTIONS A. General: 1. Size connections for the loads indicated on the Drawings. If the loads are not

indicated, use a connection whose capacity is half the total uniform load capacity shown in the “Allowable uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported” tables in the AISC Manual for the given shape, span, and steel specification of the beam in question, unless otherwise indicated.

2. All bolted connections shall have a minimum of two bolts.




B. Shop Connections: Unless otherwise indicated, all shop connections shall be welded or high strength bolted. Field connections required to be welded or fully-tensioned high-strength bolted shall meet the same requirements when fabricated in the shop.

C. Field Connections: 1. The following field connections shall be welded or fully-tensioned high-

strength bolted as shown or noted on the Drawings or, when not shown or noted, shall be either welded or fully-tensioned high-strength bolted at the Contractor’s option:

a. Column bracing. b. Connections for supports of machinery. . D. Standard Beam Connections: 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or required in the Specifications,

all beam connections shall be framed in accordance with Part 4 of the AISC Manual, with sizes and lengths of angles and welds and with fastener spacings as shown therein.

2. Standard beam connections shown on the Drawings shall be fabricated as detailed. Substitutions will not be approved.

E. High-Strength Bolted Connections (Amendments to the Specification for Structural

Joints): 1. In Item 3(b) of the specification, change the second sentence to read “Burrs

shall be removed.”. 2. In Item 3(c) of the specification, delete the last two sentences, and add the

following sentence: “Flame cut surfaces shall be ground smooth.”. 3. In Item 7(b)(1) of the specification, add the following to the last sentence: “,

except that oversize holes shall not be used in connections with galvanized faying surfaces.”.

4. In Item 7(b)(2) of the specification, add the following to the last sentence: “, except that short slotted holes shall not be used in connections with galvanized faying surfaces when the force on the joint is in a direction other than normal to the axis of the slot.”.

5. In Item 7(b)(3) of the specification, add the following to the last sentence: “, except that long slotted holes shall not be used in connections with galvanized faying surfaces when the force on the joint is in a direction other than normal to the axis of the slot.”.

6. Change Item 7(c)(3) of the specification to read as follows: “All fully-tensioned high-strength bolts shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening, regardless of the method of tightening.”

7. In Item 8(b) of the specification, change the first sentence to read: “A tension measuring device shall be required at all work sites where fully-tensioned high-strength bolts are being installed.”.

8. In Item 8(c) of the specification, delete the second and third sentences and add the following sentence: “ The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness attained by either a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a worker with an ordinary spud wrench that brings the connected plies into firm contact.”




9. Change the last sentence in Item 8(c) to read “Unless otherwise required in the Specifications, bolts required to be fully-tensioned shall be identified on the Drawings. All other bolts need only be tightened to the snug tight condition.”

10. In Item 9(b) of the specification, delete “Arbitration” from the heading. Also change the first paragraph to read: “When high-strength bolts have been installed by any of the tightening methods in Item 8(d), the following inspection procedure shall be used.”.

11. In Item 9(c) of the specification, delete “arbitration” from the last sentence. 12. In Item 9 of the specification, the inspection of bolt tightening shall be as

specified under Item 9(b). Furnish the calibration device and the inspection torque wrench, and make them available, upon request, to representatives of the State or designated inspection laboratory during the entire period when steel is being fabricated and erected. The inspection torque wrench shall be capable of indicating that the job inspecting torque has been reached by a second method in addition to direct observation of the wrench dial. The inspection wrench calibration and the bolt tightening inspection shall be performed by the Contractor, and shall be witnessed by a representative of the Director or the designated inspection laboratory.

F. Design, Fabrication and Erection (Amendments to the AISC Specification): 1. In Item A6. of the specification, change “American Welding Society” to

“American Welding Society (Latest Adoption Date)”. Delete the date from all referenced AWS Codes.

2. In Item J1.8. of the specification, change the last sentence to read: “Weld access holes and beam copes in other shapes shall be ground smooth, but need not be inspected by dye penetrant or magnetic particle methods.”.

3. In Item J1.12 of the specification, delete “or with A325 bolts” from the second paragraph.

4. In Item J2. of the specification, change the introductory sentence to read: “All provisions of the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code-Steel, AWS D1.1, except Sections 2.3.2.4, 2.5, 8.13.1 and 9, apply to work performed under this Specification.”.

5. In Item J3.2.c of the specification, change the first sentence to two sentences as follows: “Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plys of slip-critical connections, except those with galvanized faying surfaces. Oversized holes shall not be used in slip-critical connections with galvanized faying surfaces, or in bearing-type connections.”.

6. In Item J3.2.d. of the specification, change the second sentence to two sentences as follows: “Short-slotted holes are permitted without regard to direction of loading in slip-critical connections, except those with galvanized faying surfaces. The length of the slot shall be normal to the direction of the load in slip-critical connections with galvanized faying surfaces and in bearing-type connections.”.

7. In Item J3.2.e of the specification, change the second sentence to two sentences as follows: “Long-slotted holes are permitted without regard to direction of loading in slip-critical connections, except those with galvanized faying surfaces. The length of the slot shall be normal to the direction of the load in slip-critical connections with galvanized faying surfaces and in bearing-type connections.”.




8. In Item M2.2. of the specification, delete the first two paragraphs. 9. In Item M2.5. of the specification, change the second sentence of the fifth

paragraph to read: “Burrs shall be removed.”. 10. Delete Item M4.5. of the specification in its entirety. 11. In Item M5.4. of the specification, delete “Slip-critical” from the heading and

delete “slip-critical” from the first sentence. G. Fabrication and Erection (Amendments to the AISC Code): 1. In Item 4.1. of the code, delete the last sentence of the first paragraph. 2. In Item 5.1. of the code, change the first paragraph to read: “Contract

Drawings are not considered released for construction. Orders for materials may be placed only after approval of erection drawings or written approval of the Director.”

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all structural steel required by this

Contract. Machine-duplicated copies of Contract Drawings will not be accepted as shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be standard 24 by 36 inch size sheets, except that erection drawings may be larger. The margin line shall be drawn a minimum of 1/2 inch from edge of sheet. The title block shall be placed in the lower right hand corner of the drawing, and shall contain the fabricator’s name, address, and telephone number. Failure to submit legible drawings of required size will be cause for their disapproval without review. If the drawings are not prepared by a detailer under the direct control of the fabricator, the fabricator shall stamp each drawing and initial or sign the stamp to certify review and approval of the drawings, and conformance with the fabricator’s shop practice and capability.

1. Include anchor bolt and base plate plans, erection drawings, and detailed drawings for all members.

2. All shop drawings shall be checked by the detailer before submission. Failure to submit checked shop drawings will be cause for their disapproval without review.

3. Changes initiated by the detailer or fabricator to previously reviewed shop drawings shall be resubmitted.

4. Indicate all required shop and field welds by Standard AWS Welding Symbols in accordance with AWS A2.4.

5. When shop drawings are marked “Approved as Noted”, promptly resubmit copies of corrected shop drawings for formal approval and record.

6. Contract Drawings are not considered released for construction. Orders for materials may be placed only after approval of erection drawings or written approval of the Director.

B. Product Data: 1. Shop Paint: Manufacturer’s name and printed product literature, including

storage and application instructions. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Certificates required under Quality Assurance Article. 2. Fabricator’s Qualifications Data: a. Firm’s name, business address and telephone number.




b. Summary of their quality control programs. 3. Erector’s Qualifications Data: a. Firm’s name, business address and telephone number. b. Summary of their quality control programs. 4. Welder’s Qualifications Data: a. Name of each person who will be performing the Work and their

employer’s name, business address and telephone number. b. Copy of AWS certification for type of welding required. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification: Affidavit by the structural steel manufacturer certifying that structural

steel items meet the contract requirements. 1. Submit evidence of steel material compliance with this Specification.

Evidence shall consist of certification of source of material, copies of purchase orders and manufacturer's certifications. For stock material, submit copies of latest mill or purchase orders for material replacement.

a. Documentation to confirm compliance with General Conditions Article 25.4 Domestic Steel.

B. The Contractor agrees, that if the value of this contract exceeds $100,000 all structural

steel, reinforcing steel and other major steel items to be incorporated in the Work of this Contract shall be produced and made in whole or substantial part in the United States, its territories or possessions.

C. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator’s Qualifications: The fabricator of the structural steel shall be

regularly engaged in the fabrication of structural steel for a minimum of 5 years, and shall be subject to the approval of the Director. a. AISC Quality Certified Fabricators (latest list issued) are approved.

2. Erector’s Qualifications: The structural steel erector shall be regularly engaged in the erection of structural steel for a minimum of 5 years, and shall be subject to the approval of the Director.

3. Welders’ Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders, welding operators, and tackers who have been qualified by tests as prescribed in the AWS Code to perform the type of welding required. Welders shall be certified for each type weld and position before fabrication.

D. Inspection: Shop and field quality assurance inspection may be the State. If quality

assurance inspection made by the State, it shall not relieve the fabricator and erector of responsibility for their own quality control programs.

E. Galvanizing: Stamp galvanized items with galvanizer’s name, weight of coating, and

applicable ASTM number. 1.07 WELDING PROCESSES A. Use only shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, or flux cored arc welding.




1.08 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION A. Shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, or flux cored arc welding

procedures which conform to the provisions of the AWS Code shall be considered to be prequalified.

B. The welding procedures requiring qualification shall conform to the requirements of

AWS D1.1. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of anchor bolts and other anchorage devices to be built into other

construction to avoid delay. B. Upon delivery to the site, promptly cover and protect steel item from rusting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wide Flange Structural Steel: ASTM A 992.

B. Channels and Angles: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. C. Anchor Bolts, Miscellaneous Rods and anchors, and other Detail Material Not

Proportioned for Calculated Stress: ASTM A 36; or ASTM A 675, Grade 70. D. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners (High-Strength Bolts): ASTM A 325 heavy

hexagon structural bolts, nuts, and hardened washers. E. Steel Hollow Structural Sections (Round, Square, or Rectangular): ASTM A 500,

Grade B; or ASTM A 500, Grade C. F. Weld Filler Metal: 1. General: Weld filler metal shall be in accordance with Table 4.1.1 of the

AWS Code, except as follows: a. Only electrode and flux combinations complying with AWS

Classifications F7AX-EXXX or F7AX-EXXX-a, (a = B2, Ni1, Ni2, Ni3 or W), shall be used for submerged arc welding.

b. Only electrode and shielding gas combinations complying with AWS Classifications E 7XT-1 or E 7XT-5 shall be used for flux cored arc welding.

2. Weld filler metal for shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, and flux cored arc welding which conforms to AWS Specifications A5.1 or A5.5 shall be considered to be prequalified.

G. Cold Galvanizing Compound: Single component compound giving 93 percent pure

zinc in the dried film, and meeting the requirements of DOD-P-21035A. H. Bedding Mortar:




1. Cement Grout: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and clean uniformly graded natural sand complying with ASTM C 404, size No. 2; mixed at a ratio (by volume) of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, with only the minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.

2. Shrink-Resistant Grout (Ferrous): Factory-packaged, non-catalyzed, ferrous aggregate mortar grouting compound selected from the following:

a. Embeco 636 by Master Builders, 23700 Chagrin Blvd., Cleveland, OH 44122 (800) 227-3350.

b. Ferrolith G-NC by Sonneborn, Chemrex, Inc., 57-46 Flushing Ave., Maspeth, NY 11378, (800) 433-9517.

c. Ferro-Grout by L&M Construction Chemicals, 14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NB 68152, (800) 362-3331.

d. Vibra-Foil by A.C. Horn, Inc., Tamm Industries, 7405 Production Dr., Mentor, OH 44060, (800) 862-2667.

3. Shrink-Resistant Grout (Non-Staining): Factory-packaged, non-ferrous mortar grouting compound selected from the following:

a. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders, 23700 Chagrin Blvd., Cleveland, OH 44122 (800) 227-3350.

b. Sonogrout by Sonneborn, Chemrex, Inc., 57-46 Flushing Ave., Maspeth, NY 11378, (800) 433-9517.

c. Five Star Grout by Five Star Products, Inc., 425 Stillson Rd., Fairfield, CT 06430, (800) 243-2206.

d. Crystex by L&M Construction Chemicals, 14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NB 68152, (800) 362-3331.

e. Non-Corrosive, Non-Shrink Grout by A.C. Horn, Inc., Tamm Industries, 7405 Production Dr., Mentor, OH 44060, (800) 862-2667.

2.02 FABRICATION A. Do not commence fabrication until the fabricator has been approved and the

fabrication schedule has been coordinated with the designated Quality Assurance inspection agency (independent inspection laboratory or the State).

1. Give the Director’s Representative one week advance notice of the commencement of fabrication.

B. Progress shop fabrication from “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” detail drawings

only. 1. When detail drawings are “Approved as Noted”, progress fabrication in strict

accordance with notes thereon. 2. Fabrication progressed from “DISAPPROVED” or “RETURNED FOR

CORRECTION” detail drawings will be rejected. The contractor shall have no claim against the State for any costs or delays due to rejection of items fabricated from “DISAPPROVED” or “RETURNED FOR CORRECTION” detail drawings.




C. Finish column ends at base plates and at load carrying cap plates to a true plane square to the column, with a maximum American National Standards Institute surface roughness value of 500 microinches.

D. Make provision for connections of other Work, including all cutting and punching of

structural members where required by the Drawings, or for which information is furnished prior to approval of the shop drawings.

E. Prepare material in accordance with Section 3 of the AWS Code. Do not use gas or

air carbon-arc cutting to cut or enlarge bolt holes F. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise specified or noted, items indicated to be galvanized

shall receive a zinc coating by the hot-dip process, after fabrication, complying with the following:

1. ASTM A 123 for plain and fabricated material. 2. ASTM A 153 for iron and steel hardware G. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean all structural steel. Remove oil, grease, and similar

contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 “Solvent Cleaning”. Remove loose mill scale, loose rust, weld slag and spatter, and other detrimental material in accordance with SSPC SP-2 “Hand Tool Cleaning”, SSPC SP-3 “Power Tool Cleaning”, SSPC SP-6“ Commercial Blast Clean” or SSPC SP-7 “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, or SSPC SP-10 “Near-White Blast Cleaning”.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect steel in accordance with the AISC Specification, the AISC Code, the AWS

Code and the Specification for Structural Joints, except as otherwise specified. B. Prepare and place shrink-resistant grout in accordance with grout manufacturer’s

printed instructions. 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for preparation of surfaces in

contact with the grout, and for curing and protection of the grout. C. Do not use gas or air carbon-arc cutting to cut or enlarge bolt hole. D. Do not make corrections or alterations to fabricated steel without prior written

approval by the Director’s Representative. 3.02 SCHEDULE OF GALVANIZED STRUCTURAL STEEL A. In addition to members indicated on the Drawings, hot-dip galvanize structural steel

members as indicated below: 1. All exterior exposed steel. 2. All loose lintels in exterior walls. 3. Nuts, washers and the top 12 inches of exterior anchor bolts.




B. Two shop coats of High-Ratio Water Based Inorganic Zinc Silicate paint may be

substituted in lieu of hot-dip galvanizing.

END OF SECTION



METAL FABRICATION 05 50 00-1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Structural Steel (including framing for floor grating): Section 05 12 00. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Except as shown or specified otherwise, the Work of this Section shall meet the

requirements of the following: 1. Design, Fabrication, and Erection: “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,

Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design” adopted by the American Institute of Steel Construction, June 1, 1989 (AISC Specification).

a. Design and Fabrication of Cold-Formed Shapes: “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”, by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI Specification).

2. Welding: “Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1”, or “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel, AWS D1.3”, by the American Welding Society (AWS Codes).

B. Organizations: 1. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction, One East Wacker Dr., Suite 700,

Chicago, IL 60601-1802, 866-275-2472, www.aisc.org. 2. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute, 1140 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 705,

Washington, D.C. 20036, (202) 452-7100, www.steel.org. 3. AWS: American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Rd., Miami, FL 33126,

(800) 443-9353, www.aws.org. 4. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, 1819 L Street, NW, 6th Floor,

Washington, DC 20036, (202) 293-8020, www.ansi.org. 5. ASME: ASME International, 3 Park Ave., New York, NY 10016-5990, (800)

843-2763, www.asme.org. 6. ASTM: ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Dr., PO Box C700, West

Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959, (610) 832-9500, www.astm.org. 7. MPI: The Master Painters Institute Inc., 2808 Ingleton Ave., Burnaby, BC, V5C

6G7, (888) 674-8937, www.specifypaint.com. 8. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings, 40 24th Street, 6th Floor, Pittsburgh

PA 15222-4656, (877) 281-7772, www.sspc.org. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show application to project. Machine duplicated copies of Contract

Drawings will not be accepted.




1. Locate anchor bolts required for installation in other Work; furnish setting drawings and templates for required anchors.

2. Indicate shop and field welds by standard AWS welding symbols in accordance with AWS A2.4.

3. Floor Grating: Submit erection plan; include cutout areas and clearances. B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each

fabricated item specified, except submit data for fasteners only when indicated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Galvanizing: Stamp galvanized items with galvanizer’s name, weight of coating, and

applicable ASTM number. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Coordinate delivery of anchor bolts and other anchorage devices to be built into other

construction to avoid delay. B. Promptly cover and protect steel items delivered to the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wide Flange Structural Steel: ASTM A 992.

B. Channels and Angles: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. C. Anchor Bolts, Miscellaneous Rods and anchors, and other Detail Material Not

Proportioned for Calculated Stress: ASTM A 36; or ASTM A 675, Grade 70. D. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners (High-Strength Bolts): ASTM A 325 heavy hexagon

structural bolts, nuts, and hardened washers. E. Steel Hollow Structural Sections (Round, Square, or Rectangular): ASTM A 500, Grade

B; or ASTM A 500, Grade C. F. Anchors: Except where shown or specified, select anchors of type, size, style, grade, and

class required for secure installation of metal fabrications. For exterior use and where built into exterior walls, anchors shall be galvanized or of corrosive-resistant materials.

G. Fasteners: Except where shown or specified, select fasteners of type, size, style, grade,

and class required for secure installation of metal fabrications. For exterior use and where built into exterior walls, fasteners shall be galvanized.

1. High Strength Threaded Fasteners (high Strength Bolts): ASTM A325, bolts,

nuts and hardened washers.




H. Stainless Steel : schedule 10 pipe, 304L, ¼” plate. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Fabricate metal framing and supports, which are not a part of the structural steel

framework, to support related items required by the Work. B. Fabricate units to the sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required

dimensions to receive adjacent Work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars, of all welded construction, with mitered corners, necessary brackets and splice plates, and a minimum number of joints for field connection. Punch, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work.

C. Galvanize exterior steel framing and supports. 2.03 LOOSE BEARING PLATES A. Steel plates fabricated flat, free from warp or twist, and of required thickness and bearing

area. Drill plates as required for anchor bolts and for grouting access. Furnish bearing plates where shown and where required for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction.

2.04 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Fabricate railings and handrails of 1-1/2 inch (nominal) diameter steel pipe, unless

otherwise shown. B. Railings: Unless otherwise shown, railings shall consist of top rail and intermediate rails,

with posts spaced not more than 4 feet oc. Close ends of rails which do not terminate with a flange or continuous return.

1. Space rails so that a sphere 4 inches in diameter cannot pass through the openings

between the rails. 2. Join posts, rails, and corners by one of the following methods: a. Flush-type steel railing fittings, welded and ground smooth, with railing

splice locks secured with 3/8 inch hexagonal-recessed-head setscrews. b. Coped and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate

rail to post, mitering corners, groove welding joints, and grinding joints smooth. Butt railing splices and reinforce by a tight-fitting interior pipe sleeve not less than 6 inches long secured in place.

3. Railings may be bent at corners instead of joining, provided the bends are uniformly formed in jigs, with cylindrical cross-section of pipe maintained throughout the entire bend.

4. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate railings and accessories as necessary to secure posts and rail ends to construction as follows:




a. Anchor posts in concrete by means of post sleeves preset into the concrete.

b. Anchor rail ends to steel with oval or round steel flanges welded to rail ends and bolted or welded to steel supporting members.

5. Post Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe not less than 6 inches long, and having an inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the pipe post. Sleeve shall have a plate closure, sized to extend not less than 1 inch beyond the outside diameter of the sleeve, secured to the bottom of the sleeve.

a. Cover Flange: Round steel flange, sized to closely fit post and cover the sleeve.

6. Kickplates: Flat steel bars 3/16 inch thick by not less than 6 inches high. Secure kickplates as shown.

C. Handrails: Pipe handrails shall be secured to walls by means of wall brackets, and shall

have a wall return fitting at each end of handrails unless otherwise shown. 1. Wall Brackets: Malleable iron castings, with 3 inches projection from the finish

wall surface to the center of the handrail, and with the wall plate portion of the bracket drilled to receive one 3/8 inch diameter bolt. Brackets shall be located approximately 6 inches from each end of handrails and intermediate brackets equally spaced at intervals not exceeding 5 feet oc. Fabricate wall brackets to secure to wall construction as follows:

a. Anchor into concrete and solid masonry with expansion anchors. 2. Wall Return Fittings: Cast iron castings, flush-type, with the same projection as

specified for wall brackets. D. Galvanize all exterior railings and handrails and handrails where indicated on the

Drawings, including pipe, flanges, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous metal components.

2.05 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE & CONDUIT SLEEVES AND FLANGE PLATE

A. Secure as per fabricators recommendations w/ gasket to masonry opening perimeter. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Use materials of the sizes and thicknesses indicated on the Drawings. If not indicated, use

material of required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability for the intended use of the finished product.

B. Fabricate items to be exposed to view of material entirely free of surface blemish,

including pitting, roller and seam marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove surface blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding prior to cleaning, treating, and finishing.




C. Form metal true to line, with accurate angles, surfaces, and straight edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the metal.

D. Weld corners and seams continuously. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match

and blend with adjoining surfaces. E. Form exposed connections with flush, smooth, hairline joints. Use concealed fasteners

wherever possible. Use Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise shown or specified.

F. Prepare fabricated items for anchorage of the type indicated, coordinated with the

supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce adequate support for the intended use of the item.

G. Punch, reinforce, drill, and tap fabricated items as required to receive hardware and other

appurtenant items. H. Galvanizing: 1. In addition to specific items specified or noted to be galvanized, galvanize items

attached to, embedded in, or supporting exterior masonry 2. Unless otherwise specified or noted, items indicated to be galvanized shall receive

a zinc coating by the hot-dip process, after fabrication, complying with the following:

a. ASTM A 123 for plain and fabricated material, and assembled products. b. ASTM A 153 for iron and steel hardware.

3. Welded and abraded areas of galvanized surfaces shall be wire brushed and repaired with a coating of cold galvanizing compound.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Temporarily brace and secure items which are to be built into concrete, masonry, or

similar construction. B. Isolate non-ferrous metal surfaces to be permanently fastened in contact with ferrous metal

surfaces, concrete, or masonry by coating non-ferrous metal surface with bituminous mastic, prior to installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION




A. Fit and set fabricated metal items accurately in designed locations, at proper elevation and alignment.

B. Use anchorage devices and fasteners of required type, size, and number as required to

provide a secure, rigid installation. C. Fit exposed connections accurately to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which

are not intended to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of size limitations. Grind welded joints smooth. Cut off exposed threaded portion of bolts flush with nut.

D. Attached Work: Drill holes for fasteners with power tools to exact size required. Unless

otherwise shown on the Drawings, fasten metal Work to concrete and solid masonry anchorage with expansion anchors. Fasten metal Work to hollow masonry and stud partitions with square head toggle bolts.

E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Codes for the procedures for shielded metal arc

welding, for the appearance and quality of welds, and for the methods used in correcting welding Work.

F. Railings: Adjust railings prior to securing in place to insure alignment and proper

matching at joints. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts in concrete with post sleeves preset into the concrete. After the posts have been inserted into the sleeves, fill the annular space between post and sleeve solid with molten lead or an exterior quick-setting hydraulic cement. Cover anchorage joint with a cover flange.

END OF SECTION



FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-1

SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide and install all flashing, trim and sheet metal Work as indicated on the Drawings, as required for the completed Work , and as specified herein. All metal to receive waterproofing must be primed. The Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following :

1. Flashing at equipment penetrations 2. Wall Flashings 3. Stainless Steel Cluster Conduit Flanges


A. Unit Masonry Section 04 20 00 B. Metal Fabrication Section 05 50 00 C. Joint Sealants Section 07 92 00

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Nat ional Association (SMACNA).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM ). C. Federal Specifications (FS). D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manu facturers (NAAMM)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

Show the manner of forming, jointing, and securing the metal flashings and trim. Include expansion joint connections, and the method of forming waterproof connections to adjoining constru ction.

B. Product Data

Catalog sheets, specifications, installation instru ctions for each item specified except for shop or job formed items, solder, flux, and bituminous coating.

C. Samples

1. Materials for Flashings: One 6" sq. piece, for e ach type material

specified.

2. Anchors: Six, each type required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply w ith applicable recommendations, details, and standards of CDA, and SMACNA.

B. All metal Work shall ink-stamped at intervals, i dentifying Manufacturer, type metal, and gage or thickness.

C. Manufacturer's Recommendations for factory fabri cated items, follow the manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions unless specifically shown or specified otherwise.





A. Deliver, store, and handle products of this Sect ion in such manner to protect them from damage.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not execute the Work of this Section unless t he Owner's Representative is present, unless otherwise directe d.

B. Make the roof and wall all uncompleted flashings watertight at the end of each work day.

1.08 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall provide a two (2) year writ ten guarantee, covering the flashing and sheet metal materials and workmans hip. Should any defects occur during the stated period, they shall be corrected immediately, and all damage caused by such defects shall be corrected; all corrective Work shall be at the Contractor's ex pense.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FOR FLASHING FABRICATION

A. Stainless Steel Sheet

Dead soft fully annealed stainless steel sheet, AST M A167, Type 302/304, 32D dull finish.

B. Fabricated Stainless Steel Conduit Sleeves and C luster Flanges Schedule 10 Pipe and 1/4” Flange 304L minimum.

2.02 FASTENERS & MASTIC

A. Nails

"Stronghold" type large flat head roofing nail.

1. For Stainless Steel: Stainless steel.

B. Screws, Bolts, and other Fastening Accessories

1. For Stainless Steel: Stainless steel.

C. Anchors

Provide one of the following types:

1. Hammer driven anchors, consisting of a stainless steel drive pin and a corrosion resistant metal expansion shield in serted through a stainless steel disc with an EPDM sealing washer.

2. Self-tapping, corrosion resistant, concrete and masonry screw

inserted through a stainless steel disc with an EPD M sealing washer.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Solder

Composition of block tin/pig lead of proportion rec ommended by the metal manufacturer, stamped either 50/50 or 60/40 " Warranted".

B. Flux




Paste or acid type as recommended by the metal manu facturer.

C. Bituminous Coating (for separating dissimilar me tals):

FS TT-C494.

D. Type 3 Sealant (For concealed sealant joints of through-wall cap receivers and other areas which require concealed s ealant).

One part butyl rubber sealant; Pecora BC-158, PTI 7 07, or Woodmont chem-Calk 300.

E. Through Wall Flashing Joint sealant

Trowel grade asphalt roof cement.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Where practicable, form and fabricate sheet metal W ork in the factory or shop. Produce bends and profiles accurately to t he indicated shapes. Where not indicated or specified, follow the applic able requirements of the reference standards listed in PART 1.

B. Aluminum fascia

1. Aluminum, 24 ga. (0.020") 2. Fabrication

a. Fabricate fascia and fittings to shapes and prof iles as

shown on Drawings; if details are not indicated, fo llow applicable requirements of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual of SMACNA.

b. Form fascia in 10'-0" long sections, minimum unl ess otherwise noted.

C. Factory applied paint, for color see Section 09 06 00, Schedule for Finishes.

C. Aluminum drip edge

1. Aluminum, 20 ga. (0.032")

2. Fabrication

a. Fabricate drip edge to shapes and profiles as sh own on Drawings; if details are not indicated, follow appl icable requirements of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manua l of SMACNA.

b. Form drip edge in 10'-0" long sections, minimum unless otherwise noted.

C. Factory applied paint, for color see Section 09 06 00, Schedule for Finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with other W ork for the correct sequencing of items which make up the entire system of weatherproofing or waterproofing.

3.02 PREPARATION




A. Do not install the Work of this Section unless a ll necessary nailers,

blocking and other supporting components have been provided.

B. Do not install the Work of this Section unless a ll substrates are clean and dry.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Isolation

Separate dissimilar metals from each other with bit uminous coating.

B. Tinning and Soldering

1. Use soldering irons (heavy coppers) as Industry Standard. Torch soldering is not acceptable.

2. Clean, flux and tin all surfaces to be soldered.

3. Sweat solder thoroughly into seams, completely f illing the seam

for the full width.

4. Upon completion of soldering, remove all traces of flux residue, and if required, apply a neutralizing wash followed by a clean water wash.

--- END ---



FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 -1

SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, in cluding General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide firestop systems consisting of a material, or combination of materials installed to retain the integrity of f ire resistance rated construction by maintaining an effective barr ier against the spread of flame, smoke and/or hot gases through penetrations, fire resistive joints, and perimeter openings in ac cordance with the requirements of the Building Code for this proj ect.

B. Firestop systems shall be used in locations includi ng, but not limited to, the following:

1. Penetrations through fire resistance rated floor an d roof assemblies including both empty openings and openin gs containing penetrants.

2. Penetrations through fire resistance rated wall ass emblies including both empty openings and openings containi ng penetrants.

3. Membrane penetrations in fire resistance rated wall assemblies where items penetrate one side of the ba rrier.

4. Joints between fire resistance rated assemblies.

5. Perimeter gaps between rated floors/roofs and an ex terior wall assembly.

6. Perimeter gaps between conduit sleeves and conduit at exterior wall assembly.

C. Related Sections include, but are not limited to, t he following:

1. Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection

2. Division 09 – Finishes

3. Division 22 – Plumbing

4. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditio ning

5. Division 26 – Electrical

1.3 REFERENCES

A. New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code of New York State 2010

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code)

C. American Society For Testing and Materials Standard s (ASTM):




1. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM E814: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of T hrough-Penetration Firestops.

3. ASTM E1966: Test Method for Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

4. ASTM E1399: Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Mea suring Minimum and Maximum Joint Width.

5. ASTM E119: Methods of Fire Tests of Building Constr uction and Materials.

6. ASTM E2174: Standard Practice for On-Site Inspectio n of Installed Fire Stops

7. ASTM E2307: Standard Test Method for Determining th e Fire Endurance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using t he Intermediate-Scale, Multi Story Test Apparatus (ISM A)

8. ASTM E2393-04 Standard Practice for On-Site Inspect ion of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimete r Fire Barriers

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor Program.

2. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

3. UL 723: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

4. UL 1479: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Sto ps.

5. UL 2079: Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Join t Systems.

E. UL Fire Resistance Directory -Volume 2:

1. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHJI)

2. Fire Resistive Ratings (BXUV)

3. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)

4. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material (XHHW)

F. Omega Point Laboratories (OPL)

1. Building Products, Materials & Assemblies – Volume II

G. Factory Mutual Research (FM):

1. FM 4991: FM Approval Standard of Firestop Contracto rs – Class 4991

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping: The use of a material or combination of materials in a fire-rated structure (wall or floor) where it has been breached, so as to restore the integrity of the fir e rating on that wall or floor.




B. System: The use of a specific firestop material or combination of materials in conjunction with a specific wall or floor construction type and a specific penetrant(s).

C. Barrier: Any bearing or non-bearing wall or floor that has an hourly fire and smoke rating.

D. Through-penetration: Any penetration of a fire-rat ed wall or floor that completely breaches the barrier.

E. Membrane-penetration: Any penetration in a fire-ra ted wall or floor/roof-ceiling assembly that breaches only one side of the barrier.

F. Fire Resistive/Construction Joint: Any gap, joint, or opening, whether static or dynamic, between two fire rated b arriers including where the top of a wall meets a floor; wa ll edge to wall edge applications; floor edge to floor edge co nfigurations; floor edge to wall.

G. Perimeter Barrier: Any gap, joint, or opening, whet her static or dynamic, between a fire rated floor assembly and an exterior wall assembly.

H. Approved Testing Agencies: Not limited to: Underwri ters Laboratory (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), Warnock Herse y, and Omega Point Laboratory (OPL).

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Penetrations: Provide through-penetration and membr ane-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, passage of smoke and oth er hot gases according to requirements indicated, to restore the original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.

1. Provide and install complete penetration firestoppi ng systems that have been tested and approved by natio nally accepted testing agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions.

2. F-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with F-r atings indicated, as determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, but not less than one (1) hour or the fire resistance ratin g of the assembly being penetrated.

3. T-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with T-ra tings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, where required by the Building Cod e.

4. L-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with L- r atings less than 5cfm/sf.

5. W-Rated systems: Provide firestop systems that are resistant to water. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-re sistant through-penetration firestop systems.

6. For penetrations involving non-metallic, CPVC, PVC, or plastic piping, tubing or conduit, provide firestop systems




that are chemically compatible in accordance with Manufacturer requirements.

7. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provid e firestop systems not requiring removal of insulatio n.

8. For penetrations involving fire or fire/smoke dampe rs, only firestop products approved by the damper manufactur er shall be installed in accordance with the damper installa tion instructions.

B. Fire Resistive Joints: Provide joint systems with f ire resistance assembly ratings indicated, as determined by UL 207 9 (ASTM E1399 and E1966), but not less than the fire resistance a ssembly rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. Fir estopping assemblies must be capable of withstanding anticipa ted movements for the installed field conditions.

1. For firestopping assemblies exposed to view, traffi c, moisture, and physical damage, provide products tha t after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these con ditions both during and after construction.

2. For floor penetrations exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of suppor ting floor loads involved either by installing floor pla tes or by other means, as specified by the Architect.

3. L-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with L- r atings less than 5cfm/sf.

C. Firestopping products shall have flame spread ratin gs less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings less than 450, as de termined per ASTM E 84. Note: Firestop products installed in pl enum spaces shall have a smoke developed rating less that 50.

D. Engineering Judgment (EJ): Where there is no specif ic third party tested and classified firestop system available for an installed condition, the Contractor shall obtain from the fir estopping material manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) to be submitted to the Approving Authority, Design Profes sional and Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval prior to installation. The EJ shall follow International Firestop Council (IFC) guidelines.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping produc t selected. Manufacturers certification must verify that firest opping materials are free of asbestos, lead and contain vo latile organic compounds (VOCs) within limits of the local jurisdi ction.

B. Design Listings: Submit system design listings, in cluding illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspect ing agency that is applicable to each firestop configuration.

C. Installation Instructions: Submit the manufacturer’ s installation instruction for each firestop assembly.

D. Where there is no specific third party tested and c lassified firestop system available for a particular configur ation, the




Contractor shall obtain from the firestopping mater ial manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) for submi ttal.

E. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS): Submit for each type of firestopping product selected.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilitie s and experience. Submit documents as per 1.7.

G. A quality control manual approved by FM or UL (if a pplicable).

H. Firestop Schedule: Submit schedule (see appendix A ) itemizing the following:

1. Manufacturer’s product reference numbers and/or dra wing numbers.

2. Listing agency’s design number.

3. Penetrating Item Description/Limits: Material, siz e, insulated or uninsulated, and combustibility.

4. Maximum allowable annular space or maximum size ope ning.

5. Wall type construction.

6. Floor type construction.

7. Hourly Fire resistance rating of wall or floor.

8. F rating.

9. T, L, and W rating, if applicable.

I. Firestop Application Log: A separate binder shall b e prepared and kept on site for use by the Inspection Agency and t he Authority Having Jurisdiction. The binder shall contain the following:

1. The binder shall be a three (3) ring binder.

2. Firestop Schedule (see appendix A)

3. All approved firestopping assemblies including engi neering judgments shall be provided and organized by trade.

4. Copy of manufacturer’s installation instruction for each firestop assembly.

5. A matrix or table of contents listing each assembly shall be provided.

6. The binder shall be updated as new firestop assembl ies or EJ’s are added.

7. The binder shall be kept on-site at a location appr oved by the Owner.


A. Provide firestopping system design listings from UL , FM, Warnock Hersey or OPL in accordance with the appropriate AS TM Standard(s) per article 1.5.

B. Contractor Qualifications: An acceptable Firestop Contractor shall be:




1. Licensed by State or Local Authority where applicab le, or

2. FM Research approved in accordance with FM Standard 4991, or

3. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor, or

4. Meet the following requirements

i. Installation personnel shall be trained by the approved firestop manufacturer.

ii. The installation firm shall be experienced in installing firestop systems and fire resistive join t systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successfu l performance.

iii. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified tested and listed system requirements.

iv. Minimum of three (3) years experience and shown to have successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects and provide references.

C. Single Source Limitations: Obtain firestop systems for all conditions from a single manufacturer.

D. Materials from different firestop manufacturers sha ll not be installed in the same firestop system or opening.

E. Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead fr ee and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous so lvents.

F. Firestopping sealants must be flexible, allowing fo r normal movement.

G. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surfaces s uch that a void is created.

H. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water after curing.

I. Materials used shall be in accordance with the manu facturer’s written installation instructions.

J. Identify installed firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfa ces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the fire stop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechani cal fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adh ering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding label s to surfaces on which labels are placed and provide a label mate rial that will result in partial destruction of label if removal i s attempted. Include the following information on labels:




1. The words "Warning - Firestop System - Do Not Distu rb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Firestop system designation of applicable testing a nd listing agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Firestop system manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.

K. Inspection of penetrations through fire rated floor and wall assemblies shall be in accordance with ASTM E2174, Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire S tops and ASTM E2393-04 Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection o f Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Bar riers. The Owner may engage a qualified, independent inspectio n agency, or material testing agency to perform these inspection s.

L. Field Mock-up Installations: Prior to installing f irestopping, erect mock-up installations for each type firestop system indicated in the Firestop Schedule to verify select ions made and to establish standard of quality and performance by which the firestopping work will be judged by the Owner or Ow ner’s Representative. Obtain acceptance of mock-up insta llations by the Owner or Owner’s Representative before start of firestopping installation. Provide at least 72 hours notice to Owner or Owner’s Representative prior to inspection


A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in or iginal, unopened containers or packages with intact and leg ible manufacturer’s labels identifying product and manuf acturer, date of manufacture/expiration, lot number, listing agen cy’s classification marking, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials per manufacturer’s instr uctions to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, te mperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

C. All firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration date.


A. Environmental Limitations: Install firestopping wh en ambient or substrate temperatures are within limits permitted by the manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not instal l firestopping when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condens ation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate per the manufacturers written instruction s on the product’s Material Safety Data Sheet.

C. Verify the condition of the substrates before start ing work.

D. Care should be taken to ensure that firestopping ma terials are installed so as not to contaminate adjacent surface s.




1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate areas prior to firestopping installation with the Owner, Construction Manager and/or all other Contra ctors.

B. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that firestopping assemblies are installed a ccording to specified requirements. Opening shall not exceed m aximum restrictions allowable for annular spacing per list ing or acceptable Engineering Judgments.

C. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drille d holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration fir estop systems.

D. Do not conceal firestopping installations until the Owner’s inspection agency or Authorities Having Jurisdictio n have examined each installation.

E. Schedule firestopping after installation of penetra nts and joints but prior to concealing or obstructing access to ar eas requiring firestopping.

F. Preinstallation Conference: This conference should be a joint meeting attended by the Owner’s Representative and all prime contractors, respective firestopping sub-contractor s and firestopping company field advisor to review projec t requirements. The agenda for the conference should include the following topics:

1. Review scope of work.

2. Review shop drawings and firestop application log.

3. Review mock-up requirements.

4. Discuss identification labels and locations.

5. Review schedule, coordination and sequencing with a ll trades.

6. Review any engineering judgments or other special requirements.

7. Function and frequency of inspections and testing l abs.

G. Destructive testing shall be performed at mock up a nd at pre determined intervals according to ASTM E 2174 and A STM E 2393-04 by the inspector and with the installing Contractor present. Inspector to test for in place installation conform ance to tested and listed system or engineering judgment details. Non conformances will result in additional destructive testing, at the cost of the installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Firestopping products specified in system design li stings by approved testing agencies may be used providing the y conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular spac e requirements and fire rating involved in each separate assembly.

B. Manufacturer of firestopping products shall have be en successfully producing and supplying these products for a period




of not less than three years and be able to show ev idence of at least ten projects where similar products have been installed and accepted.

C. Accessories: Provide components for each firestop system that is needed to install fill materials and to comply with “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only components specifi ed by the firestopping manufacturer and by the approved testi ng agencies for the firestop systems indicated. Accessories in clude, but are not limited to the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, includ ing the following:

i. Slag wool fiber insulation.

ii. Foams or sealants used to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.

iii. Fire-rated form board.

iv. Polyethylene/polyurethane backer rod.

v. Rigid polystyrene board.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Steel sleeves

D. All firestopping products and systems shall be desi gned and installed so that the basic sealing system will all ow the full restoration of the thermal and fire resistance prop erties of the barrier being penetrated with minimal repair if pen etrants are subsequently removed.

2.2 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before applicat ion, comply with firestopping manufacturer’s written instructio ns for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if requ ired), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed t o produce products of uniform quality with optimum performanc e characteristics for application indicated.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provid e products by one of the following or equivalent manufacturers:

1. Grace Construction Products.

2. Nelson Firestop Products.

3. Hilti Firestop Products.

4. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

5. RectorSeal Corporation (The).

6. Specified Technologies Inc.

7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.




8. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance wi th requirements for opening configurations, penetratin g items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performa nce.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Verify that all pipes, conduits, cables, and/or oth er items which penetrate fire-rated construction have been permane ntly installed prior to installation of firestops.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately b efore installing firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and th e following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could inte rfere with adhesion of firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to p roduce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestop systems. Remove loose particles rema ining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concre te.

3.3 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

A. General: Install firestop systems to comply wit h “Performance Requirements” article in Part 1 and firestopping ma nufacturer’s written installation instructions and published dra wings for products and applications indicated.

B. Installation of firestopping shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified as described in arti cle 1.7.

C. Apply firestopping in accordance with approved test ing agencies listed system designs or manufacturer’s EJ per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and s uitable for installation of firestop products.

E. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories required to support fill materials during their app lication and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional s hapes and depths required to achieve fire resistance ratings required.

F. Install joint forming/damming materials and other a ccessories required to support fill materials during their app lication and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional s hapes and depths of installed firestopping material relative to joint




widths that allow optimum movement capability and a chieve fire resistance ratings required.

G. Install metal framing, curtain wall insulation, mec hanical attachments, safing materials and firestop material s as applicable within the system design.

H. Install fill materials for firestop systems by prov en techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids, joints and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as re quired to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they fully contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items .

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

4. Tool non-sag firestop materials after their applica tion and prior to the time skinning begins. Use tooling age nts approved by the firestopping manufacturer.

I. On vertical pipe penetrations, lift riser clamps to permit the installation of firestopping around the entire pipe penetration. For penetrations involving fire or fire/smoke dampe rs, only firestop products approved by the damper manufactur er shall be installed in accordance with the damper installatio n instructions.


A. Inspecting Agency: Authorities Having Jurisdictio n, the Owner, or Owner’s Representative shall be allowed to perform random destructive testing during inspection of firestop s ystems to verify compliance per listings or manufacturer’s in stallation instructions. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Authorities Having Jur isdiction and inspection agencies. The contractor shall be respo nsible to repair all tested assemblies with no cost to the ow ner.

B. Proceed with enclosing firestop systems with other construction only after inspections are complete.

C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace fir estop systems so they comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to opening s, as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials t hat are approved in writing by firestopping manufacturer(s) and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. Leav e finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of s pillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions du ring and after installation that ensure firestop systems are witho ut damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. I f, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cu t out and




remove damaged or deteriorated firestop systems imm ediately and install new materials to produce firestop systems c omplying with specified requirements.

--- END OF SECTION ---

Firestopping 07 84 00-Appendix A

FIRESTOP SCHEDULE

Project No:

Contractor Name and Address: Date Submitted:

Project Title:

Supplier/Installer Name and Address: Company Field Advisor Name and Address:

Manufacturer Name and Address:

Manufacturer's Product Reference Numbers and/or Drawing Numbers

U.L., FM, Warnock Hersey or Omega Point Lab Penetration Design Nos.

Penetrating Item: Material, Size, Insulated, Combustible, Joint, Perimeter, etc. Description:

Maximum Allowable Annular Space or Maximum Size Opening

Wall type Construction

Floor Type Construction

Fire Resistance Rating of Wall or Floor (Hourly)

F Rating T Rating (floors Only)

L Rating (if available)

W Rating (if available)

DES. CONST.

Example No. 1 DCFSS-130

UL #130 Maximum 4" Steel Pipe Non-Insulated

P4 6" CMU N.A. 1 Hour 1 Hour N.A .



JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 -1

SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies but not limited to sealant, caulking materials, pre-formed joint seals and applications as shown on the Drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Metal Fabrications Section 05 50 00

B. Firestopping Section 07 84 00

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS.

B. Manufacturer's installation instructions for eac h product used.

C. Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent material.

D. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Caulking compound 2. Primers 3. Sealing compound, each type, including compatibi lity when

different sealants are in contact with each other. 4. Preformed modular molded rubber bolted seal ass emblies.

1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in manufacturers' original uno pened containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, shelf life, and m aterial designation clearly marked thereon.

B. Carefully handle and store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.

C. Do not subject to sustained temperatures exceedi ng 90 degrees or less

than 40 degrees F. 1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions of terms in accordance with ASTM C71 7 and as specified.

B. Back-up Rod: A type of sealant backing.

C. Bond Breakers: A type of sealant backing.

D. Filler: A sealant backing used behind a back-u p rod. 1.6 GUARANTEE: Guarantee exterior sealing against l eaks and subject to terms of

"Guaranty" Article specified in Section, GENERAL CO NDITIONS, except that guaranty period shall be two years in lieu of one y ear.

1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below form a part of thi s specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.




B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM ):

C570-72(1985)Oil and Resin-Base Caulking Compound f or Building Construction C612-83Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insula tion C717-88Definitions of Terms Relating to Building Se als and Sealants (Rev. A). C790-84Use of Latex Sealing Compounds C804-83Use of Solvent-Release Type of Sealants C834-76(1986)Latex Sealing Compounds C919-84Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. C920-87Elastomeric Joint Sealants C962-86Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants C1085-87Butyl Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Sealants .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Manufacturer shall have been continuously engaged i n the manufacture of sealants and caulking as specified in the Specifica tions and Drawings for a minimum of ten (10) years. The acceptable manufac turers are:

A. GE Silicones, Waterford, NY 1 800 255 8886

Pecora Corp., Harleysville, PA 1 800 523 6688 ChemRex (Sonneborn), Shakopee, MN 1 800 243 6739

2.1 SEALANTS: Refer to Appendix, Schedule for Types of Applications

A. S-1. 1. ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2. Type M. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 20-40

B. S-2.

1. ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2. Type M. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade P. 5. Shore A hardness of 25-40.

C. S-3.

1. ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2. Type S. 3. Class 25, joint movement range of plus or minus 50 percent. 4. Grade NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 15-25. 6. Minimum elongation of 700 percent.

D. S-4.

1. ASTM C920 polyurethane or polysulfide. 2. Type S. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 25-40.

E. S-5.

1. ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2. Type S. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade P. 5. Shore hardness of 15-45.




F. S-6. 1. ASTM C920, silicone, neutral cure. 2. Type S. 3. Class: Joint movement range of plus 100 percent to minus 50

percent. 4. Grade NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 15-20. 6. Minimum elongation of 1200 percent.

G. S-7.

1. ASTM C920, silicone, neutral cure. 2. Type S. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 25-30.

H. S-8.

1. ASTM C920, silicone, acetoxy cure. 2. Type S. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 25-30.

I. S-9.

1. ASTM C920 silicone. 2. Type S. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 25-30. 6. Non-yellowing, mildew resistant.

J. S-10

1. ASTMC C920, coal tar extended fuel resistance po lyurethane. 2. Type M/S. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade P/NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 15-20.

K. S-11

1. ASTM C920 polyurethane. 2. Type M/S. 3. Class 25. 4. Grade P/NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 35 to 50.

L. S-12

1. ASTM C920, polyurethane. 2. Type M/S. 3. Class 25, joint movement range of plus or minus 50 percent. 4. Grade P/NS. 5. Shore A hardness of 25 to 50.

2.2 CAULKING COMPOUND

A. C-1: ASTM C834, acrylic latex. B. C-2: ASTM C1085, butyl rubber. C. C-3: One component acoustical caulking, non dryi ng, non hardening,

synthetic rubber. D. C-4: ASTM C570, oil and resin.

2.3 COLOR

A. Sealants used with unpainted concrete shall matc h color of adjacent




concrete. B. Color of sealants for other locations shall be l ight gray or aluminum,

unless specified otherwise. C. Caulking shall be light gray or white, unless sp ecified otherwise.

2.4 BOND BREAKERS

A. Polyethylene tape or similar type and consistenc y recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application .

B. Back-up Rod: ASTM C962, Type A, joint-fillers; closed cell neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, vinyl, or polyethylene rod; di ameter approximately 1-1/3 times the joint width.

2.5 FILLER

A. Mineral fiber board: ASTM C612, Class 1. B. Thickness same as joint width. C. Depth to fill void completely behind back-up rod .

2.6 PRIMER

A. As recommended by manufacturer of caulking or se alant material. B. Stain type.

2.7PREFORMED JOINT SEALS

A. Link Seal - preformed modular molded rubber bolted seal assemblies to seal annular space between conduit and pipe sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect substrate surface for bond breaker conta mination and unsound materials at adherent faces of sealant.

B. Coordinate for repair and resolution of unsound substrate materials.

C. Inspect for uniform joint widths and that dimens ions are within tolerance established by sealant manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATIONS

A. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C962.

B. Clean surfaces of joint to receive caulking or s ealants leaving joint

dry to the touch, free from frost, moisture, grease , oil, wax, lacquer paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to d estroy or impair adhesion.

C. Do not cut or damage joint edges.

D. Apply masking tape to face of surfaces adjacent to joints before

applying primers, caulking, or sealing compounds.

E. Apply primer to sides of joints wherever require d by compound manufacturer's printer instructions.

1. Apply primer prior to installation of back-up ro d or bond breaker

tape. 2. Use brush or other approved means that will reac h all parts of




joints. 3.3 BACKING INSTALLATION

A. Install back-up material, to form joints enclose d on three sides as required for specified depth of sealant.

B. Where deep joints occur, install filler to fill space behind the back-up

rod and position the rod at proper depth.

C. Cut fillers installed by others to proper depth for installation of back-up rod and sealants.

D. Install back-up rod, without puncturing the mate rial, to a uniform

depth, within plus or minus 3 mm (1/8-inch) for sea lant depths specified.

E. Where space for back-up rod does not exist, inst all bond breaker tape

strip at bottom of joint so sealant bonds only to t wo opposing surfaces.

F. Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants. 3.4 SEALANT DEPTHS AND GEOMETRY

A. At widths up to 6 mm (1/4-inch), sealant depth e qual to width.

B. At widths over 6 mm (1/4-inch), sealant depth 1/ 2 of the width up to 13 mm (1/2-inch) maximum depth at center of joint w ith sealant thickness at center of joint approximately 1/2 of depth at ad hesion surface.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Apply the sealants and caulking only when the am bient temperature is between 4OC and 38oC (40 and 100 degrees F).

2. Do not use polysulfide base sealants where seala nt may be exposed to fumes from bituminous materials, or where water vapor in continuous contact with cementitious materials may be present.

3. Do not use sealant type listed by manufacture as not suitable for use in locations specified.

4. Apply caulking and sealing compound in accordanc e with manufacturer's printer instructions.

5. Avoid dropping or smearing compound on adjacent surfaces. 6. Fill joints solidly with compound and finish com pound smooth. 7. Tool joints to concave surface unless shown or s pecified

otherwise. 8. Finish paving or floor joints flush unless joint is otherwise

detailed. 9. Apply compounds with nozzle size to fit joint wi dth. 10. Test sealants for compatibility with each other and substrate.

Use only compatible sealant.

B. For application of sealants, follow requirements of ASTM C962 unless specified otherwise.

C. Where gypsum board partitions are of sound rated , fire rated, or smoke

barrier construction, follow requirements of ASTM C 919 only to seal all cut-outs and intersections with the adjoining c onstruction unless specified otherwise.

1. Coordinate with application of gypsum board to i nstall sealant

immediately prior to application of gypsum board.




2. Apply a 6 mm (1/4-inch) minimum bead of sealant each side of runners (tracks), including those used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction.

3. Partition intersections: Seal edges of the face layer of gypsum

board abutting intersecting partitions, before tapi ng and finishing or application of veneer plaster-joint re inforcing.

4. Openings: Apply a 6 mm (1/4-inch) bead of seala nt around all

cut-outs to seal openings of electrical boxes, duct s, pipes and similar penetrations. To seal electrical boxes, se al sides and backs.

5. Control Joints: Before control joints are insta lled, apply

sealant in back of control joint to reduce flanking path for sound through control joint.

D. Follow requirements of ASTM C790 for application of C-1 caulking.

E. Follow requirements of ASTM C804 for application of C-2 and C-3

caulking.

F. Follow requirements of ASTM C570 for application of C-4 caulking. 3.6 CLEANING

A. Fresh compound accidentally smeared on adjoining surfaces: Scrape off immediately and rub clean with a solvent as recomme nded by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.

B. After filling and finishing joints, remove maski ng tape.

C. Leave adjacent surfaces in a clean and unstained condition.

3.7 LOCATIONS

A. Use S-1, S-3, S-4 or S-6 for vertical and inclin ed joints at:

1. Both exterior and interior joints, and recesses formed where frames and subsills of windows, doors, louvers and the like adjoin other materials.

2. Joints or recesses on exterior of building (incl uding locations not specifically shown or specified) where sealing is required to prevent infiltration of water, moisture, and win d into building construction.

3. Where sealant is shown on drawings, except where sealing compounds for joints in horizontal surfaces and hig h temperature of over 200oC (400 degrees F) applications are spe cifically required.

4. Joints between new and existing exterior concret e or masonry walls, except building expansion joints.

5. Opening where pipes, conduits and similar items pass through exterior walls, except for high temperature of over 200oC (400 degrees) application.

6. Bottoms of exterior doorway frames. 7. At penetrations through flashings.

B. Use S-6 at:

1. Metal-to-metal joints where sealing is shown or specified.

C. Use S-6 or S-9 in fire rated partitions or combi nation fire and smoke

or sound rated partitions.




D. Use S-9 in baths, toilets, showers, lockers, or kitchens. Use at

openings between walls and partitions where pipes o r toilet and bath accessories or anchors penetrate partition includin g openings between adjacent lockers, vanities, casework shelving, and plumbing fixtures, built-in or surface mounted.

E. Horizontal Traffic Surfaces:

1. Use S-11 in horizontal surfaces such as floors, unit pavers, and

walkways.

F. Use S-10 for floors of garage or parking areas.

G. Use S-9 for sealing between adjoining wall finis h and sinks, bath tubs, shower receptors, service sinks and penetrations of wall surfaces in showers including escutcheon (cover) plates.

H. Use S-7 or S-8 for high temperature sealant at c ollars of engine

exhaust pipes, flues, or boiler stacks.

I. Use caulking compound or sealant for the followi ng interior applications:

1. Use C-1, C-2, C-3 or C-4 unless specified otherw ise for:

a. Openings 6 mm (1/4-inch) and less between walls and partitions and adjacent lockers, casework, laborato ry furniture, shelving, built-in or surface mounted equipment, and lighting fixtures.

b. Perimeters of frames of doors, windows, access p anels and the like which adjoin exposed interior concrete and masonry surfaces.

c. Joints of interior masonry walls and partitions which adjoin columns, pilasters, concrete walls or exteri or walls.

d. Perimeters of lead framed control windows which adjoin plaster or gypsum board walls.

e. Exposed joints at top of full height walls and p artitions where isolation seals occur.

f. Where caulking is shown on drawings. g. Other interior locations where small voids betwe en

materials require filling for painting.

2. Use S-9 or C-2 for exposed areas in acoustical or sound rated and smoke barrier partitions.

3. Use S-9, C-1, C-2, or C-3 in concealed acoustica l or sound rated and smoke barrier partition construction.

--- END OF SECTION ---




APPENDIX SCHEDULE

Typical Joint Types and Potential Movement Requirements Recommended Sealant

A. Minimal Movement Sealants (+25% or -25% movement capability)

1. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters o f doors, windows,

wall penetrations, S-1, 3, 4, or 6.

2. Horizontal joints not exposed to fuel or gas spi llage, S-2, or 5

B. Glazing Sealants

1. Structural Glazing, S-7 or 8 (Requires pre-testi ng and prior

written approval from the sealant

2. Non-structural, S-7 or 8

C. Interior Sealants and Caulking

1. General, C-1

2. Special

a. Bathrooms and kitchens, C-9 b. Exposed acoustical, S-9 or C-2 c. Non-exposed acoustical, S-9 or C-3

- - - END OF APPENDIX - - -



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 -1

SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Section specifies but not limited to materials, lab or, equipment and services necessary to install metal studs, tracks, runners, furring members, fasteners and steel grounds to receive screw-attached gypsum wallboard in non-load bearing interior construction assemblies as specifi ed in the Drawings.


A. Firestopping.................................... ..Section 07 84 00 B. Gypsum Board.................................... ..Section 09 29 00

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM ), latest editions.

C 645 Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gyp sum Board.

C 646 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gyp sum Sheet

Material to Light Gage Steel Studs.

C 754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Rece ive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.

B. Gypsum Association

GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

Fire Resistance Directory.

D. United States Gypsum Co.

Gypsum Construction Handbook

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples.

B. Product Data

Submit manufacturers' specifications for the produc ts specified; metal studs and fasteners.

C. Shop Drawings

Submit for approval showing partitions fully dimens ioned.

D. Samples

1. Submit samples of stud, track, shoes and furring channels in

minimum 12" lengths for approval before any Work is commenced.

2. Submit Fasteners: 10 each type.




E. Material Certificates

Submit certificates from the manufacturers of the s pecified materials stating compliance with the applicable requirements set forth for all materials specified in this Section.


A. Qualifications

Installer is to be a firm with not less than five y ears of successful experience in the installation of specified materia ls.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Building Code: Work of this Section shall confo rm to all

requirements of the N.Y.S. Building Code and all ap plicable regulations of other governmental authorities.

2. New York City Board of Standards and Appeals (BS A), or

3. New York City Materials Equipment Acceptance (ME A)

4. Fire Resistance Rating: Where ratings are indic ated, match

applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by Fire Testing Laboratories or to design designations in UL Fire R esistance Directory

5. Sound Transmission Ratings: Where sound transmi ssion ratings

are required, provide assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File Nos. in GA Fire Resistance Design Manual.

C. Single Source Responsibility

Obtain all steel studs and accessories from a singl e manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containe rs or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer.

B. Store all materials inside under cover in a mann er to keep them dry,

protected from weather, surface contamination, corr osion and damage from construction traffic and other causes.

C. Handle studs and furring channels in a manner to prevent from being

bent or mangled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide materials from one of the following manu facturers:

1. National Gypsum Co., Charlotte, NC. 1 800 628 46 62

2. United States Gypsum Co., Chicago, IL. 1 800 874 4968 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Studs

In compliance with ASTM C 645, provide galvanized s teel, C-shaped members as specified or shown on Drawings of sizes indicated below:




1. Stud depth: 1 5/ 8", 2

1/ 2", 35/ 8" or 4" as shown, unless otherwise

noted.

2. Stud thickness: 0.0188 inch min. thickness of b ase metal or 25 gage, unless otherwise indicated, for all wall fram ing members.

3. Stud thickness: 0.0478 inch min. thickness of b ase metal or 18

gage, unless otherwise indicated, for use at all fr amed openings, with double studs at each door jamb and as wall fra ming members in areas where tile backer board is specified.

4. Stud thickness: 0.0329 inch min. thickness of ba se metal or 20

gage, unless otherwise indicated, for use at all fr amed wall and ceiling areas where water and mold resistant interi or panels (Fiberock Aqua-Tough) are specified and/or shown on Drawings.

5. Stud thickness: 0.0270 inch min. thickness of base metal or

22 gage, unless otherwise indicated, for use at all framed wall and ceiling areas where glass mat faced and mold re sistant panels (DensArmor Plus) are specified and/or shown on Drawings.

B. Runners

In compliance with ASTM C 645, provide galvanized s teel runners to match applicable assembly specified, typically 0.0329 inc h min. thickness of base metal or 20 gage to match wall framing memb ers.

C. Furring Members

In compliance with ASTM C 645, provide galvanized c old rolled steel, 0.0329 inch min. thickness of base metal or 20 gage , 7/8" depth, screw type, hat shaped channels, where specified.

D. Furring Members for Shaft/Plumbing Chase Walls

Provide galvanized steel C-H studs, J-Runners or ot her stud shapes specified on Drawings, 0.0329 inch min. thickness o f base metal or 20 gage.

E. Furring Anchorages

In compliance with furring manufacturer's requireme nts, provide 16 gage galvanized wire ties, clips and anchorages.

F. Steel Grounds

Provide 20 gage galvanized steel grounds, 8 inches wide by minimum 24" length for installation directly to steel studs to provide support for equipment and accessories indicated on Drawings.

G. Horizontal Bracing

In compliance with ASTM C 645; provide 3/4 inch gal vanized, cold rolled steel channels, fastened to inside of webs in a hor izontal position, where indicated on Drawings.

H. Fasteners

Provide fasteners of type, size, style, grade and c lass required for secure installation of framing and furring. Galvan ize all fasteners and accessories.

1. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, re gular hexagon




head.

2. Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561, square head.

3. Machine Bolts: FS FF-B-584 head, FS FF-N-836 nu ts

4. Machine Screws: FS FF-S-92, cadmium plated stee l

5. Plain Washers: FS FF-W-92, round, general assem bly grade, carbon steel.

6. Lock Washers: FS FF-W-84, helical spring type, carbon steel

7. Toggle Bolts; Tumble-wing type: FS FF-B-588, t ype, class and

style as required to sustain load.

8. Self-Drilling Fasteners: No. 12-14 x 3/4 inch, hex washer head, self drilling fastener with pilot point.

B. Rigid Board Insulation

½” thickness for spacers between all metal stud fra ming and exterior walls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine all Work prepared by others to receive W ork of this Section and Commencement of Work will be construed as compl ete acceptance of preparatory Work by others.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General

Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturers specified installation instructions for all non-load bearing steel stud in stallations.

1. Extend all fire-rated partitions to underside of roof or floor

construction. Brace laterally for stability as requ ired.

2. Extend all non-fire-rated partitions minimum six inches above the installed ceiling height.

3. Brace all non-fire-rated partitions with diagona l steel studs

in alternate directions every four (4) feet on cent er at right angles to partitions. Screw to top of partitions.

B. Steel Stud Installation

1. Where partitions abut ceiling or deck constructi on or vertical

structural elements, provide slip or cushion type j oint between metal framing and structure as recommended by manuf acturer to prevent transfer of structural loads or movements t o partitions, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Align tracks accurately at floor and ceiling. Se cure runner

tracks as recommended by the framing manufacturer for the upper and lower construction involved, except, do not ex ceed 24" on center spacing for power driven fasteners. Provid e fasteners approximately 2" from corners and ends o f tracks.

3. Position studs vertically and engage both floor and ceiling




tracks. Space studs 16" on center unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Fasten studs to track flanges wit h screws.

a. Use full length studs between tracks wherever po ssible.

If necessary, splice studs with a minimum 8" nested lap and fasten with 2 screws per stud flange.

b. Provide additional studs to support inside corne rs at

partition intersections, and to support outside cor ners and terminations of partitions (and both sides of c ontrol joints).

4. Frame openings other than door openings to compl y with details

shown and manufacturers instructions. Provide full length studs adjacent to jambs and horizontal header and s ill tracks. Extend studs to underside of roof or floor construc tion above.

5. Provide two 18 gage studs at each door jamb unle ss heavier gage

studs are required by Drawings. Comply with stud m anufacturers recommendations for the types of frames and weights of doors used in the project. Studs are to extend to underside o f roof or floor construction above.

6. Construct fire rated partitions, vertical ductwo rk enclosures,

column enclosures, etc. to meet or exceed the ratin g shown on the Drawings.

C. Steel Ground Installation

1. Install steel grounds at all locations where wal l hung or wall

mounted items such as teachers lockers, material ca binets, sink cabinets, chalkboards, display boards, pegboards, h ook strips, grab bars, etc. are indicated.

2. Apply steel grounds horizontally to steel studs beginning with

first stud beyond item being secured (both directio ns) prior to installation of gypsum board.

3. Install steel grounds behind top and bottom of e ach item to be

installed, adding grounds as necessary at points of attachment. Use suitable screws and/or bolts to anchor items. F ollow manufacturer's recommendations for proper attachmen t methods.

D. Furring Channel Installation

1. Attach hat-shaped metal furring channels or meta l furring as

shown on Drawings, to masonry or concrete surfaces; either vertically or horizontally, 16" on center and withi n 2" of interior corners unless otherwise indicated on Draw ings. Attach furring with hammer-set or power driven fast eners through alternate flanges spaced 24" on center. Provide me tal furring channel clips.

2. Where furring channel or metal furring as shown on Drawings, is

installed directly to exterior wall and a possibili ty of water penetration through walls exists, install asphalt f elt protection strip between furring channel and wall.

3. Where furring channel or metal furring as shown on Drawings, is

installed directly to exterior wall, install minimu m ½” thickness rigid board insulation spacers between fu rring channel and wall.

4. Where splices in channels occur, nest channels 8 " at splices and




anchor with two fasteners in each wing.

E. Running Channel Installation Floor and ceiling running channels or stud tracks s hall be 20 gage galvanized cold rolled steel with 1/2" legs to matc h gauge of studs specified in assembly. Securely fasten to floor, r oof or vertical structural elements with 1/2" stud bolts or other m ethod approved by manufacturer, spaced not more than 24" on center. Provide slip or cushion type joint between channel and structural e lements as indicated in B, above.

F. Horizontal Bracing or Stiffener Installation

Install 3/4" steel furring channels fastened to ins ide of stud with webs in a horizontal position as indicated on Drawi ngs. Space channels 6 feet on center minimum unless otherwise indicated .

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Tolerances

Do not exceed 1/8" in 8 feet variation from plumb o r level in any exposed line or surface, except at joints between planes or abutting edges or ends. Shim as required to comply with specified to lerances.

- - - END - - -



GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 -1

SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Section specifies but not limited to all gypsum boa rd installations including regular, moisture resistant, fire resistant [Type X ] gypsum board and water & mold resistant interior panels and exterior soffi ts as specified in the Drawings.


A. Joint Sealants.................................. ..Section 07 92 00 B. Non-Structural Metal Framing.................. ....Section 09 22 16 1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM ), latest editions.

A 525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Co ated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C 36 Gypsum Wallboard

C 442 Gypsum Backing Board

C 473 Physical Testing of Gypsum board P roducts, Gypsum Lath,

Gypsum Partition Tile or Block and Pre-Cast Reinfor ced Gypsum Slabs

C 475 Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallb oard

Construction

C 630 Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Boards.

C 665 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing

C 840 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

C 919 Practices for Use of Sealants in Acoustical A pplications

C 1002 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gy psum Board. E 119 Fire Tests of Building Constructions and Mat erials.

B. Gypsum Association

GA-216 Recommended Specifications for the Applicati on and

Finishing of Gypsum Board

GA-505 Gypsum Board Products - Glossary of Terminol ogy

GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)




Fire Resistance Directory

D. United States Gypsum Co.,

Gypsum Construction Handbook

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data

Submit manufacturers' specifications for the follow ing products: gypsum board, joint compound, acoustical sealant an d insulation.

C. Samples

Submit samples of the following materials, prior to installation:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 inches square, each type speci fied.

2. Fasteners: 10, each type.

3. Acoustical Sealant: 1 pint.

4. Insulation: 12 inches square, each type specifi ed.

D. Materials Certificates

Submit certificates from the manufacturers of the s pecified materials stating compliance with the applicable requirements set forth for all materials specified in this Section.

E. Shop Drawings

Submit for approval showing partitions fully dimens ioned.


A. Qualifications

Installer is to be a firm with not less than (5) ye ars of experience in the installation of specified materials.


1. Building Code: Work of this sections shall conf orm to all

requirements of N.Y.S. Building Code.

2. New York City Board of Standards and Appeals (BS A) approval, or

3. New York City Materials Equipment Acceptance (ME A)

4. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resis tance ratings as indicated and as required by governing authoriti es and codes. Provide materials, accessories and application proc edures which




have been listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E119 for the type of construction shown. For two-hour d uct shafts, comply with UL Designation 6-23-75.

5. Acoustical Ratings: Comply with (STC) Acoustica l ratings as

required and based on type of construction indicate d on the Drawings. Provide materials, accessories, includin g fasteners, seals, resilient channels (if any), seal ants and application procedures which have been listed by ma nufacturer or tested in accordance with ASTM E90 for the type of construction shown.

6. Industry Standard: Comply with applicable requi rements of

GA-216 "Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board" by the Gypsum Association, except where more detailed or more str ingent requirements are indicated, including the recommend ations of the manufacturer.

C. Single Source Responsibility

Gypsum board materials shall be obtained from one o f the acceptable manufacturers. Materials from more than (1) manufa cturer may not be used in a system or assembly.

D. Field Samples

The Architect will request review of the first comp leted gypsum board installation for inspection of taping and spackling work. This installation, when approved by the Architect, will become the benchmark for workmanship for the rest of the installation.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containe rs or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer.

B. Store all materials inside, under cover, in a ma nner to keep them dry,

protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface co ntamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.

C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces.

Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged.

D. Store All Fiberock® Brand Aqua-tough Interior Panels flat, panels are heavy requiring special handling and care.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General

Comply with requirements of all referenced gypsum b oard application standards and manufacturers recommendations for env ironmental conditions before, during and after gypsum board ap plication.

B. Cold Weather Protection

When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55 oF, maintain continuous uniform building temperatures of not less than 55 oF for a minimum of 48 hours prior to, during and following application of gypsum board




and joint treatment materials and until joint and f inishing compounds have dried.

C. Ventilation

Ventilate building spaces as required to remove wat er in excess of that required for drying of joint treatment materia l immediately after its application. Avoid drafts during dry hot weath er to prevent too rapid drying.

D. Drying Time

Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between c oats with additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas.


Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pr oducts of one of the specified manufacturers conforming to AS TM C 36, C 442 and C 630 and ASTM D3273-00:

A. Gypsum Board and Other Products

1. National Gypsum Co., Charlotte, NC. 1 800 628 46 62

2. GP Gypsum Corp., 1 800 947 4497

3. United States Gypsum Co., Chicago, IL. 1 800 874 4968

4. Trim-Tex, Lincolnwood, IL 60712. 1 800 874 2333

B. Metal Support Materials

1. W.P. Hickman Co.

2. Milcor Division; Inryco Inc.

3. United States Gypsum Co. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Board

1. General: Comply with ASTM C 36 and Fed. Spec SS -L-30, type III, class 1, style 3, taper-edged and of the grade and form specified below, in 48" widths and in such lengths as will re sult in the minimum number of joints.

2. Regular: Grade R, form A, 5/8" thick for single ply

applications, Firecode Core.

3. Fire Resistant:




a. ASTM C 36, type X, UL Listed. 5/8" and 1/2" thic k; for single ply and double ply applications.

b. Ultracode core, 3/4" thick. c. Firecode C core, 5/8" and 1/2" thick.

4. Moisture Resistant: Comply with ASTM C 630, Reg ular; 5/8" and

1/2" thick.

5. Shaft Wall Liner Panel -(Gypsum Coreboard - ASTM C 442) Regular; 1" thickness

6. Foil-back: Regular panel, Firecode core, with speci al

kraft-backed aluminum foil laminated to back surfac e, 5/8" thickness. Permeance shall comply with max.0.06 pe rm in tests per ASTM E96 (desiccant method).

B. Fiberock Aqua-Tough Interior Panels:

1. Aqua-tough Interior Panels, 5/8" Thickness, 48" Width and

Lengths of 8' to 12'.

2. Joint Reinforcement

a. Tiled Areas: Durock® Brand Joint Tape with Late x-fortified Mortar or Latex-based Type I Mastic.

b. Untiled Areas: Sheetrock® Brand Joint Tape, She etrock® Brand Durabond® Setting-type Joint Compound.

3. Fasteners

a. Corrosion-resistant Type S-12® Buglehead Screws for 20-14

Ga. Steel Framing.

4. Adhesives/mortars-products:

a. Meeting ASTM C557.73: Multiple Purpose Adhesives. b. Meeting ANSI A136.1: Type I Organic Adhesive. c. Meeting ANSI A118.4: Latex Modified Portland Ce ment

Mortar.

5. GROUT: Products meeting ANSI A118.6, A118.3 (EPO XY) C. Metal Accessories

1. General: Comply with ASTM C 1047; standard acce ssories as

recommended by manufacturers, formed of galvanized steel, beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Prov ide L-type edge trim beads, V-type edge trim beads, and contro l joint beads.

2. Edge Beads: For use at perimeter of ceiling; sh all be angle

shaped with wings not less than 3/4" wide with con cealed wing perforated for nailing and exposed wing folded flat .

D. Joint Treatment Materials




1. Jointing System-Typical: Comply with ASTM C 475 ; type recommended by the manufacturer for the application shown.

a. Jointing system shall include reinforcing tape (plain or

perforated) and compound designed as a system to be used together. Compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by the manufacturer. Jointing compound shall be asbestos free.

b. If the approved jointing system requires job-add ition of water, use only clean and potable water for that pu rpose.

2. Jointing System-Water Resistant: Use water-resistant

joint compound as recommended by the gypsum board m anufacturer for joints, fastener heads and cut edges of water r esistant backing board.

E. Miscellaneous Materials

1. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board work of

the type and grade recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer

2. Gypsum Board Screws: Comply with ASTM C 1002.

a. For fastening the gypsum board in place, use fla thead screws, shouldered, specially designed for use with power-driven tools, of length indicated but not les s than 1" long, with self-tapping threads and self-drillin g points. Screws shall be steel with rust inhibited coating.

3. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Comply with ASTM

C 919;nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstai ning, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant for concealed applica tions.

4. Exposed Acoustical Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 919;

nonoxidizing, skinnable, paintable,gunnable sealant for exposed applications, either latex or acrylic based type or acrylic-latex type.

5. Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 665, Type 1, Min eral Fiber

Blanket.

a. Sound attending blankets, Type I, Class A by Uni ted States Gypsum.

b. Foil backed insulating blankets, Type II, Class A, R value

as indicated on Drawings by USG.

6. Asphalt felt: Comply with ASTM D 226, Type 1 (N o. 15). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspection




Prior to installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of all other trades and verify t hat all such Work is complete to the point where this installation ma y properly commence.

B. Discrepancies

Do not install gypsum board until all unsatisfactor y conditions have been corrected.

C. Construction Tolerances.

Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8 feet variation from plu mb or level in any exposed line or surface except at joints between bo ards. Do not exceed 1/16 inch variation between planes or abutting edge s or ends. Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General

Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturers specified installation instructions for all gypsum board application and f inishing.

1. Extend all fire-rated partitions to underside of roof and floor

construction.

2. Extend all non fire-rated partitions a minimum o f six (6) inches above the installed ceiling height, and brace wall with diagonal steel studs as specified in Section 09110 of this S pecification.

3. Install the gypsum board with separat e boards in moderate

contact but not forced into place. At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges of the board by over lapping covered edges of the abutting boards. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a commo n point except in vertical corners.

B. Walls

1. Install the gypsum board to studs at right angle s to the furring

or framing members. Make end joints, where require d, over furring or framing members. Position boards so tha t like edges abut, with tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger v ertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of pa rtitions.

2. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum

board in concealed spaces (above ceilings) except i n chase walls, which are braced internally.

3. Where sound-rated work is indicated on Drawings, including

double-layer installations, Work is to be sealed at perimeters, at control and expansion joints and all penetration s with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a b ead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and al l




manufacturer's recommendations for location of bead s, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.

4. All interior partitions, unless otherwise indica ted, shall have

"Thermafiber" sound attending blankets, Type 1, Cla ss A by United States Gypsum. Sound attending blankets are to be installed between studs for the full height of the partitions (thickness shown on Drawings).

5. All exterior partitions, unless otherwise indica ted, shall have

foil backed "Thermafiber" insulating blankets, Type II, Class A, R value as shown by United States Gypsum. Exter ior partitions shall be filled solid with insulating blankets.

6. Where gypsum board is to be installed over furri ng channels,

apply gypsum board parallel to channels. Position all edges over furring channels in parallel application; all ends over framing in perpendicular application with joints st aggered in successive courses. Use maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. Fasten panels to channels with 1 inch screws spaced 16 inches o.c.

C. Application of Double layer of 5/8" Fire-retarda nt Gypsum Board

Attach base layer to steel studs with 1" screws at 24" o.c.; attach face layer with 1 5/8" screws at 16" o.c. Apply pa nels of both layers vertically, with joints between layers offset 16" m in. Offset end joints also, if applicable. Install metal trim at corners and at junctures with other material. Finish joints and s crew heads as specified. Caulk perimeter.

D. Shaft Walls (2 hour rating)

Construct with 1" liner panels inserted in C-H stud s 24" o.c. and with double layer 1/2" Firecode "C" panels screw attache d to C-H studs.

E. Fasteners

Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled p ower screwdrivers, spacing the screws (1 1/ 4") at 12" o.c. at ceilings and screws (1") at 16" o.c. at walls. Where framing members are spaced 24" apart on walls, screw spacing shall be 12" o.c.

F. Water Resistant Gypsum Board.

Install in accordance with the manufacturer's print ed instructions, or as in E. above except use 11" screws at 8" o.c.

3.03 JOINT TREATMENT

A. General 1. Inspect all areas to be joint treated, ascertain ing that the

gypsum board fits snugly against supporting framewo rk.




2. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool.

B. Embedding Compound

1. Apply to gypsum board joints in a thin uniform l ayer. Spread

the compound not less than 3" wide at joints, cente r the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape i n the compound. Then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape.

2. After this treatment has dried, apply a second c oat of embedding

compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 6" wide at joints, an d feather edged. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points.

C. Finishing

1. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and h as been

completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compou nd to all joints and fastener heads. Feather the finishing c ompound to not less than 12" wide. When thoroughly dry, sandp aper to obtain uniformly smooth surfaces, taking all necessary car e to not scuff the paper surface of the gypsum board.

2. Omit third coat and sanding on concealed gypsum board and on

Work which is shown on the Drawings to receive appl ied decorative finish other than paint.

3.04 CORNER TREATMENT

A. Internal Corners Treat as specified for joints, except that the rein forcing tape shall be folded lengthwise through the middle and fitted neatly into corner.

B. External Corners

1. Install a corner bead fitting neatly over the co rner and secured

with the same type fasteners used for applying the gypsum board, spacing the fasteners approximately 6" o.c. and dri ving through the gypsum board into the framing and furring membe r. For fire-rated walls, install gypsum wallboard with min imal setback on 90 degree outside corners. Fastening by "crimpin g" or any method other than described above shall not be acce pted.

2. After the cornerpiece has been secured into posi tion, treat the

corner with joint compound and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out from 8" to 10" on each side of the corner.

3.05 OTHER METAL TRIM

A. General




The Drawings do not purport to show all locations a nd all requirements for metal trim in connection with the Work of this Section. Carefully study the Drawings and the installation; provide i n place all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of th e gypsum board used.

B. Installation

Install the metal trim in strict accordance with th e manufacturer's recommended methods of installation, providing not less embedment and finishing than specified above for corner treatment .

3.06 CONTROL JOINTS

Install controls using US Gypsum Zinc Control Joint no. 093 in the following locations:

G. Partition, furring or column fireproofing abutting a structural

element (except floor) or dissimilar wall and/or ce iling. H. Ceiling or soffits abutting a structural element, d issimilar wall or

partition or other vertical penetration. I. Construction changes within plane of partition or c eiling. J. Partition or furring wall lengths exceeding 30 feet . K. Ceiling dimensions exceeding 50 feet in either dire ction with perimeter

relief (change in plane). L. Ceiling dimensions exceeding 30 feet in either dire ction without

perimeter relief (change in plane). M. Structural expansion and/or control joints. N. Door and/or window frames that do not extend to the ceiling and shall

have control joints at both corners of the framed o pening. The specified zinc control joint shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation which is certified fo r 1 and 2-hour fire-rated walls.

3.07 CLEAN UP

A. In addition to the requirements of these Specifi cations, use all necessary care during execution of this portion of the Work to prevent scattering of gypsum board scraps and dust and to p revent tracking of joint and finishing compound onto floor surfaces . At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scraps, debris and surplus material of this Section.

- - - END - - -



ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-1

SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide acoustical ceiling Work as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein, including the following:

1. Acoustical Mineral Fiber Panel and Tile Ceilings

a. Lay-in panel installation - exposed grid

1.02 REFERENCES

A. References and industry standards listed in this Section are applicable to the Work. Unless more restrictive cr iteria or differing requirements are explicitly stated in the Specifications, or mandated by governing codes or regulations, the recommendations, suggestions, and requirements described in the refe renced standards shall be deemed mandatory and applicable to the Wor k.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM ), latest edition.

C423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Abs orption

Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method.

C635 Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Tile an d Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

C636 Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Syste ms for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. D1779 Specification for Adhesion for Acoustical Mat erials E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building M aterials. E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Sound Trans mission

Class

E119 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

E413 Determination of Sound Transmission Class

E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceilin g

Products.

E1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Atte nuation Between Rooms Sharing a common Ceiling Plenum (CAC)

E1477 Standard Test Method for Luminance Reflectanc e Factor

(LR) LR1 >75%

C. AMA-1-II Ceiling Sound Transmission Test By Two- Room Method D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)




Fire Resistance Directory

E. Acoustical and Insulation Materials Association, "Job Conditions".

F. New York City Building Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

Submit manufacturer's product specifications and in stallation instructions for ceiling materials, indicating comp liance with applicable requirements. Include information pertai ning to fire performance, flame spread, and smoke development.

B. Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawing details for each space indicati ng the relationship to mechanical and electrical Work and other items penetrating or connected to the ceiling. Indicate framing and support details for the ceiling Work.

C. Samples

1. Submit samples of the following materials, prior to installation;

a. Acoustical panels: 6"x6" samples of each type,

pattern and color.

b. Lay-in mineral fiber acoustical panel with field cut tegular edge on one edge, painted to match factory tegular edges. The other three edges shall have manufactured tegular profile: 12” x 24” sample.

c. Metal Panel Ceiling units: Full size sample of each

type and finish.

d. Exposed runners and moldings: 8" long samples o f each color and system type required.

e. Concealed suspension members: 1 set of each ass embly

specified.

2. Forward each approved sample type to Mechanical Installer for purpose of matching diffusers.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals

1. Affidavit certifying experience of the installat ion company. 2. Certification and listing by an Approved Agency in

accordance with NYC Dept. of Buildings rules, indic ating that the materials and assemblies regulated by the NYC Building Code are acceptable for the intended use. When test methods are stipulated in the NYC Building Code, th e tests utilized shall be stated in the Certification. Pri or MEA




and BSA approvals are acceptable for materials conf orming to current Code requirements.

E. Project Closeout Submittals 1. Guarantee 2. Extra Materials (Attic Stock 10%) F. Low Emitting Materials Compliance Submittals

1. Provide documentation for each sealant and adhes ive to be

used indicating that the sealants and adhesives com ply with V.O.C. requirements as stated in Specification Sect ion G01600.


A. Qualifications Installer is to be a firm with not less than five y ears of successful experience in the installation of specif ied materials.


1. Building Code: Work of this Section shall confor m to all

requirements of the N.Y.C. Building Code and all ap plicable regulations of other governmental authorities.

2. Certification and listing by an Approved Agency in

accordance with NYC Dept. of Buildings rules. Prior MEA and BSA approvals are acceptable for materials conformi ng to current Code requirements.

C. Fire Performance Characteristics

Provide ceiling components that are identical to th ose tested for the following fire performance characteristics, acc ording to ASTM test method, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Id entify ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable t esting and inspecting agency. 1. Acoustical Mineral Fiber Panel and Tile Ceilings and Metal

Panel Ceilings

a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM E84. Tested surfaces shall be the surfaces facing the occupied space.

1) Flame Spread: 25 or less.

2) Smoke Developed: 25 or less.

b. All materials exposed to the airflow in ceiling cavity

plenums used for supply, return, or exhaust air sha ll be non-combustible or have a maximum smoke develope d index/rating of 50, as defined by and in accordance with NYC Construction Code Sections BC 719 and MC 6 02.




Flame spread index shall not exceed 25. Tested surfaces shall be the surfaces facing the plenum.

D. Coordination of Work

Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling units and suspension system components with other work above, supported by, or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtu res, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression systems and partitions. Resolve all discrepancies and conflicts prior to start of Work.


A. Delivery

Deliver all acoustical units in manufacturer's orig inal, unopened packages fully identified with type, finish, perfor mance data and compliance labeling.

B. Storage

1. Store materials where they will be protected aga inst damage

from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contaminati on or other causes.

2. Store ceiling unit containers in space where the y will be

installed for at least 24 hours prior to installati on to stabilize moisture content and temperature.

C. Handling

Handle ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping ed ges or damaging units in any way.


A. Space Enclosure

Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until s pace is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is com pleted and dry, work above ceilings is completed, and until air tem perature and humidity are maintained at values of final occupanc y.

1. Pressurized plenums: Operate HVAC system for no t less than

48 hours before beginning acoustical panel or ceili ng installation.

1.09 GUARANTEE

A. Work showing defects in workmanship or materials within the one-year guarantee period specified in the Contract sha ll be corrected as directed by the Authority. Defects in clude but are not limited to:

1. Panels/tiles or suspension system loose or impro perly

secured.

2. Panels/tiles or suspension members showing disco loration or cracking.




3. Panels/tiles or suspension members warping, sa gging, or

deforming. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS, MODELS

A. Acoustical Panels

1. Mineral Acoustical Tiles (24" x 48") to match ex isting 2.02 MATERIALS - ACOUSTICAL PANELS AND TILES

A. Mineral Fiber Panels and Tiles

1. Provide units per ASTM E1264; of designation, st yle, finish, color, acoustical range, edge detail and size as in dicated below:

a. Suspended (Exposed grid, lay-in) Installation

Style: Match existing Size: 24" x 48" x 3/4" Edge Profile: Match existing Weight: 0.95-1.05 lbs./sq.ft. NRC: Min. 0.70 CAC: Min. 35 Light Reflectance Min. 0.9 Average Color: White Finish: Factory finish

2.03 MATERIALS - METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS - INDIREC T HUNG

A. Exposed Grid Suspension System

Manufacturer's standard system, with design and fin ish to match existing.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system in accordance

with ASTM C635.

2. Face width: 15/16".

3. Main runners: Connect to direct suspension syst em (refer to Specification Section 05170). Conform to ASTM C635 for heavy-duty classification.

4. Provide runners suitable for attachment of hol d-down clips

and impact clips as applicable.

5. Hold-Down Clips for Non-Fire-Rated Ceilings: Fo r ceilings composed of lay-in panels, provide hold-down clips spaced 2'-0" o.c. on all cross tees.

6. For metal panel ceilings the exposed grid shall be furnished

by the panel manufacturer, or by a company recommen ded by the panel manufacturer, and finish shall match pane ls. Main




runners and cross runners shall be G60 hot-dipped g alvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A653, with aluminum c apping.

7. Impact Clips: Provide in high impact areas, inc luding

corridors, lobbies, and gymnasiums, and at other lo cations indicated. Provide manufacturer's impact clip ("kee p clip") system designed to absorb impact forces against lay -in panels. Provide number of clips recommended by manufacturer; not less than 4 clips per panel. Sys tem shall meet requirements of Article titled “Impaction Ceil ing System Installation”.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Edge Moldings and Trim Pieces

Provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges a nd penetrations of ceiling units which fit with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated.

B. Panel/Tile Fasteners

Cadmium plated, type recommended by panel/tile manu facturer, but for not less than 1/2" penetration of substrate.

C. Drop Clips

18-gage galvanized steel with keyhole slot, or othe r configuration approved by New York City Dept. of Buildings for co nnection of ceiling suspension members to carrying channels. Drop clips shall be of length required for indicate d ceiling height, and to provide clearances for lighting fixt ures, mechanical equipment, and other items above the cei ling. Where necessary because of limited clearance, provide cli ps that connect runners tight to the bottom of carrying channels.


A. Examine the building before beginning Work to de termine that it is properly enclosed and the structure is in proper co ndition to receive acoustical materials and suspension system. Area shall be broom cleaned and uninterrupted for free movemen t of rolling scaffold. Do not proceed until satisfactory condit ions prevail.

B. Verify that direct suspension system has been in stalled properly,

that main runners are spaced evenly and have been l eveled to a tolerance of 1/8" in 12' measured both lengthwise o n each runner and transversely between parallel runners so that i ndirect suspension system installation may proceed accurate ly.

C. Start of Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions,

therefore, contractor is advised to bring any discr epancies to the attention of the Authority prior to start of Wo rk.

3.02 PREPARATION




A. Coordination

Provide and coordinate the locations of inserts, cl ips, or other supports for support of acoustical ceilings. Determine the length of drop clips required to main tain indicated ceiling height and to provide necessary clearance f or electrical, mechanical and other equipment. Where necessary fo r clearance, clips that connect runners tight to the bottom of c arrying channels shall be used.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout o f acoustical units

to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders and comply with reflected ceiling plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacture r's printed instructions and in compliance with ASTM C636, gove rning regulations, fire resistance rating requirements, a s indicated.

1. Coordinate requirements for Work of other trades to be built

into ceiling system. Provide supplementary framing as required.

B. Cut as required for installation of electric fix tures, air

diffusers, grilles, sprinkler heads, security devic es, access doors, etc., provided under other contracts. Verif y sizes and locations with other trades.

C. On completion, the ceilings shall present a unif orm horizontal

plane surface, unless otherwise indicated, free fro m blemishes and imperfections. Exposed grid cross runners shal l fit tightly against adjacent main runners, with no visible gaps .

D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perim eter of acoustical

ceiling area and at locations where necessary to co nceal edges of acoustical units.

1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acousti cal sealant,

concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings.

2. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16"

o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

E. Install panels in coordination with suspension s ystem with

suspension members concealed by support of panel un its. F. Neatly scribe and cut panels to fit accurately a t borders,

interruptions, and penetrations. The cut edges of reveal tegular lay-in mineral fiber panels shall be field cut to m atch profile of factory edges, in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Paint the cut edges to match factory finish where exposed to view, using paint supplied by panel manu facturer.




3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings, including tr im, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace Work that cannot be successfu lly cleaned and

repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damag e.

C. Remove and replace Work that is damaged or soile d by other trades as directed by Owner's Representative.

END OF SECTION

* * *



PAINTING 09 91 00 -1

SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide all painting work and related Work as in dicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK

A. Factory Prefinished items as specified

B. Preliminary treatment provided under other Secti ons of Work

1. Definitions (Terminology used in the other Secti ons of Work)

a. Shop Coat (S) b. Prime Coat (P) c. Touch-up (T)

2. Sections

Metal Fabrications..........................Section 05 50 00

Sections under Mechanical Division 23 and Electrica l Division 26.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Federal Specifications (FS)

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

C. N.Y.S. Department of Environmental Conservation

D. U.S. Department of Labor

E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O SHA)

F. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

G. Department of Defense (DOD) 1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. The term "Painting" as used in this Section, mea ns the application of all coatings such as paint, primer, enamel, varnish , shellac, oil, etc. as listed in the Painting Schedules.

B. The term "Painting" also includes preparation of surfaces for such

applications, and the clean-up as hereinafter speci fied.

C. The term "Walls" means all surfaces from floor, or top of base, or top of wainscot, to ceiling or hung ceiling.

1. Include pilasters, breaks, jambs, reveals, retur ns, arches.

2. Include free standing columns.

3. Include masonry, plaster or gypsum board interio rs and other

enclosed spaces.




D. The term "Ceilings" means the general overhead h orizontal surfaces.

1. Include cornices, arches, soffits, stair soffits .

2. Include beam and girder haunches.

3. Include primed metal cover and border strips.

4. Include metal frame of ceiling lights and ceilin g equipment.

5. Include side faces of hung or furred ceiling.

E. Touching-up bare spots specified for previously primed or painted

surfaces is in addition to the coats specified for the paint system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data

Provide manufacturers' product literature for all m aterials specified and material manufacturer's printed directions and recommendations for environmental conditions, surface preparation, prim ing, mixing, reduction, spreading rate, application, and storage , as applicable for each of the materials specified.

C. Samples

1. Initial Selection

Submit manufacturer's color charts for each type of finish for approval by the Architect. Verify colors specified with manufacturers' color charts for availability and no tify the Architect if any discrepancies should occur.

2. Verification prior to installation

a. Submit two samples of each color and material on 12" x 12"

hard-board.

b. Submit two samples of finish on concrete masonry or other metal surfaces as required until acceptable color, sheen and texture are achieved.

3. Submit samples of stained and varnished wood in triplicate for

approval. Samples shall be 4" x 8" samples of the species of wood specified, stained and varnished as required a nd clearly labeled with type of coating, amount of coats appli ed, etc.

4. All samples shall be labeled; and include the fo llowing

information:

a. Manufacturer's name

b. Type of paint/stain/hardener

c. Manufacturer's stock number

d. Color: name and number




e. Instructions for inducing, where applicable

f. Federal Specification number, as specified

g. Federal regulations for amount of lead in paint.

h. VOC content 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General

1. All painting materials shall arrive at the job r eady-mixed.

2. Varnish containers shall not exceed 5 gallon cap acity.

3. Remove all rejected materials from the premises immediately.

4. All thinning and tinting materials shall be as r ecommended by the manufacturer. Generally, all paints shall not require additional thinning.

5. Verify that the specified shop prime paint for e ach applicable

item in this Project is compatible with the total c oating system, prior to finish painting.

6. Materials selected for each system type shall be products of a single manufacturer.

B. Qualifications

Work of this Section shall be performed by personne l with a minimum of three years experience in performing this type o f Work.

C. Regulatory Requirements

1. N.Y.S. Building Code, latest edition

2. N.Y.S. Department of Environmental Conservation -Part 205 on

"Architectural Surface Coatings" - for (VOC) Volati le Organic Compounds.

3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

4. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety an d Health

Administration, Construction Industry Standards (29 CFR 1926/1910) Revised 10/1/79, Washington, D.C.

D. Certifications

Federal Specifications: When materials are specifi ed to comply with Federal Specifications, products will be accepted w hich meet or exceed the performance requirements of such Federal Specif ications and comply with all regulations currently in effect.

1. Indicate that material complies with Federal Spe cifications by

including the Federal Specifications number on the container label or on the product literature, or submit a sta tement with the Product Data stating that material meets or exc eeds the performance requirements of the Federal Specificati ons.

E. Field Samples

1. Provide samples of each color and finish, under natural lighting




conditions, in a location where each finish is to b e applied.

2. Primer coat is to be inspected and approved in a ll locations before any subsequent finish coats are applied.

3. Repair of existing base surface is to be approve d prior to

commencement of painting. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery

Deliver materials to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturers name and label containing the followi ng information:

1. Product name or title of material

2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufact ure

3. Manufacturer's name

4. Federal Specification number, if applicable.

5. Federal regulations for amount of lead in paint (less the 0.06%

lead in non-volatile ingredients)

6. Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle constitutions

7. Thinning instructions

8. Application instructions

9. Color name and number

B. Storage

1. Maintain storage area in clean condition, store materials not in use in tightly covered containers. Remove oily rags, waste and empty containers from site each night.


A. Environmental Requirements

1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated or

will be generated while the material is drying.

3. Provide paint and coating products to comply wit h applicable environmental regulations, VOC requirements and loc al authorities.

4. In all areas, spaces and rooms being painted, th e Contractor

shall ensure that there is adequate ventilation to ensure proper paint drying, along with minimizing paint odors.

1.09 GUARANTEES

A. Adherence of workmanship and materials to Specif ications requirements shall be maintained for the one year Contract guara ntee period. These




requirements shall include the following:

1. There shall be no evidence of blistering, peelin g, crazing, alligatoring, streaking, staining, or chalking.

2. Dirt shall be removed without blemishing the fin ish by washing

with mild soap and water.

3. Colors of surfaces shall remain free from seriou s fading; the variation, if any, shall be uniform.

B. Correct all defects, appearing within the guaran tee period, by removal

of the defective work and replacement as directed.

C. All corrective measures shall be the Contractor' s responsibility, and shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra materials

At completion of Work, furnish to the Owner three ( 3) gallons of each type and color of paint used in the Work. Furnish Paint in manufacturer's original sealed containers marked wi th color names and/or numbers specified herein.


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers:

1. Benjamin Moore and Co. 2. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints Inc. 3. Pratt and Lambert 4. The Sherwin-Williams Co.

2.02 MATERIALS - PAINT

A. Provide products which meet all N.Y.S. Part 205- VOC requirements for applications outlined herein.

B. Provide products which meet all Federal regulati ons for amount of lead

in paint (less than 0.06% lead in non-volatile ingr edients).

C. Provide best quality grade of various types of c oatings as regularly manufactured by the paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturers' identification as a stand ard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.

D. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer s for applications

intended and use only within recommended limits. 2.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Paint materials shall meet or exceed the require ments of the following standards:

Federal Specifications

1. Primers, Sealers, Undercoats




a. Metal Primer (Zinc Dust, Zinc Oxide) for Galvani zed surfaces: FS TT-P-641G

b. Metal Primer Aluminum or Steel surfaces: FS TT-P -57B

c. Primer Sealer, Latex Base: FS TT-P-650C

d. Odorless Alkyd Enamel Interior Undercoat: FS TT- E-545D

e. Alkyd Primer (Corrosion Inhibiting): FS TT-P664C Lead and

Chromate Free, VOC Complying

f. Wood Primer: FS TT-P-25

2. Finish Paints

a. Exterior Alkyd Modified Paint; Gloss: FS TT-P-10 2E, Type II and Type III

b. Ext. Acrylic Latex Paint; Flat: FS TT-P-19

c. Alkyd Odorless Enamel, Interior, Gloss: FS TT-E- 505A

d. Interior Latex, Flat: FS TT-P-29J, Type I

e. Latex Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel: FS TT-P-1511A, Type I

f. Alkyd Odorless Interior, Flat: FS TT-P-30E

g. Alkyd Odorless Semi-Gloss Enamel: FS TT-E-509C f or white

and tints; FS TT-E-529 Class A for deep colors.

h. Aluminum Paint (Ready Mixed): FS TT-P-38D.

i. Heat Resistant Semi-Gloss Enamel (400 oF max. surface temperature): FS TT-E-496

j. Asphalt Varnish: FS TT-V-51

k. Smokestack Black Paint: FS TT-E-496

3. Transparent and Semi Transparent Finishing Syste ms

a. Spar Varnish: FS TT-V-121, Water Resisting b. Spar Varnish: FS TT-V-119, Phenolic Resin

c. Stain; Interior Oil Type: FS TT-S-711

d. Polyurethane Coating (Satin Finish): FS TT-C-001 951

4. Floor Finishing Systems

a. Rubber Base Paint: FS TT-P-91; For use over conc rete and

masonry

b. Cement Floor Hardener - Magnesium Zinc and Fluos ilicate type as specified in Section 03300 of this Specific ation.

c. Urethane Floor Paint: FS TT-C-542, Type II

d. Polyamide Epoxy Paint: FS TT-C535B, Type II




5. Lettering Enamel: Interior/Exterior full gloss enamel: FS TT-E-489

6. Fire Retardant Paint: Latex Fire Retardant Pain t: FS TT-P-26P

Rated Class A by Underwriters Laboratories.

7. Miscellaneous Materials:

a. Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Paint Thinner): FS TT-T-291

b. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, finely ground

pigments, at least 99 percent passing a 325 mesh si eve. Color pigments that are to be used on masonry, conc rete and plaster shall be lime proof - FS-TT-P-381.

c. Putty: Linseed-Oil type for Wood Sash Glazing

-FS-TT-P-791B.

d. Shellac: Two pound cut shellac, FS TT-S-300

e. Paste Wood Filler: FS TT-F-336

f. Plastic Wood Filler: FS TT-F-340C.

g. Surface Sealer: Pigmented Oil for Plaster & Wal lboard - FS-TT-S-179.

h. Linseed Oil: (Boiled) FS A-A-371A

i. Linseed Oil: (Raw) FS A-A-379A

j. Lacquer (Brushing) Clear and Pigmented: FS-TT-L -26C.

k. Lacquer, Rubbing, Clear: FS-TT-L-57C

l. Lacquer, Spraying Clear and Pigmented for Interi or and

Exterior Use: FS-TT-L-58E.

B. Miscellaneous Standards and Requirements

1. Turpentine: ASTM D13.

2. Cold Galvanizing Compound: DOD-P-212035A (NAVY) Single component compound giving 93% pure zinc in the drie d film.

3. Cleaning Solvents: Low toxicity; flash point in excess of 100 oF.

4. Spackling Compound: ASTM C475.

5. Polyester Filler: Polyester resin base autobody filler

standard weight or finishing grade required by cond itions; Marson's "White Lightning" and "Topcoat."

2.04 COLORS

A. Selection

1. Paint colors, surface treatments and finishes as selected by the Architect.

2. Prior to start of Work, Contractor shall furnish color chips for

surfaces to be painted as specified. Final acceptan ce of colors




will be from actual job applications. 2.05 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Surfaces Not to be Painted

1. Polished or bright metals: Aluminum, bronze, br ass, chrome, nickel, stainless steel, copper.

2. Exterior:

a. Surfaces to receive Special Coatings b. Exterior Insulation and Finish System c. Molded Millwork

3. Glass

4. Ceramic Materials

5. Resilient Flooring Materials

6. Mechanical Equipment and Cabinets, which are fac tory finished. 7. General Construction Items with factory applied final finish.

8. Factory finished Wood Doors.

9. Concealed Ducts, Pipes and Conduit.

B. Interior Finish Schedule - Standard

1. Unless otherwise noted, interior partitions insi de all walls,

frames, trims, bases, etc.: Flat 2. Ceilings and Soffits: Flat

3. Stairway, Lobby, Vestibule and all public areas: Semi Gloss

4. All interior plaster, concrete, brick or block s urfaces of walls and ceilings: Flat

5. The underside (ceiling) of all precast concrete pla nks exposed

to view: Sand Texture (Medium) 2.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Ferrous Metal

Structural steel, all ferrous metals, and steel win dow trim.

1st Coat - Touch-up with Tnemec 10-99

2nd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel -- 2.0 Mils DFT

3rd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel -- 2.0 Mils DFT

First coat not required on shop primed items.

B. Galvanized Metal

Galvanized steel lintels, all exterior hot dip galv anized surfaces to remain unpainted.




C. Aluminum

1st Coat - Aluminum metal primer -- 3.0 Mils DFT

2nd and 3rd Coats - Enamel gloss paint -- 2.0 Mils DFT/each coat

D. Chimney Cap 1st and 2nd Coats - Smokestack black paint --3.0 Mi ls DFT/each coat

E. Exterior Woodwork scheduled to be painted:

1st Coat - 1 coat Alkyd Wood Primer -- 2.2 Mils DF T

2nd and 3rd Coats - Alkyd Semi-gloss Exterior Paint -- 2.0 Mils DFT/each coat

2.07 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Concrete

1. Flat Finish:

1st Coat - Latex Wall Primer -- 1.1 Mils DFT

2nd Coat - Alkyd Flat Paint -- 2.0 Mils DFT

3rd Coat - Alkyd Flat Paint -- 2.0 Mils DFT

2. Semi-Gloss Finish:

1st Coat - Latex Wall Primer -- 1.1 Mils DFT

2nd Coat - Enamel Undercoat -- 2.0 Mils DFT

3rd Coat - Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel -- 1.8 Mils DFT

3. Gloss Enamel Finish:

1st Coat - Acrylic Primer -- 1.1 Mils DFT

2nd Coat - Epoxy Ester Gloss Enamel -- 2.0 Mils DFT

4. Sand Texture (Medium) Finish:

1st Coat - Acrylic Primer -- 1.1 Mils DFT

2nd Coat - Latex Texture -- 4.3 Mils DFT

B. Concrete Masonry Units

1. Flat Finish:

1st Coat - Surface Block Filler

2nd Coat - Latex Wall Primer -- 1.1 Mils DFT

3rd and 4th Coats - Alkyd Flat Paint--1.4 Mils DFT each coat

Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete cove rage with pores filled.




PAINTING 09 91 00 -10

1st Coat - Surface Block filler -- 2.0 Mils DFT

2nd Coat - Enamel undercoat -- 1.8 Mils DFT

3rd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel -- 1.8 Mils DFT

Apply filler to ensure filled pores.

C. Gypsum Drywall and Plaster Systems

1. Flat Finish:

1st Coat - Latex Primer Sealer -- 1.1 Mils DFT

2nd and 3rd Coats -- 2.0 Mils DFT Alkyd Flat Paint each coat


1st Coat - Latex Primer Sealer -- 1.1 Mils DFT

2nd Coat - Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel -- 1.8 Mils DFT

3rd Coat - Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel -- 1.8 Mils DFT

D. Ferrous Metal

1. Semi-Gloss Finish: Convector enclosures, grille s, access

doors, frames, Steel Doors and Frames, Guardrail (c atwalk), columns, Trim, Screens, etc.

1st Coat - Touch-up with Tnemec 10-99

2nd Coat - Enamel Undercoat -- 1.7 Mils DFT

3rd Coat - Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel -- 1.7 Mils DFT

E. Zinc-Coated Metal

1. Semi-Gloss Finish: Railings, wire-mesh work.

1st Coat - Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer -- 2.5 Mils DFT

2nd Coat - Enamel Undercoater -- 1.7 Mils DFT

3rd Coat - Alkyd semi-gloss enamel -- 1.7 Mils DFT

F. Painted Woodwork and Hardboard

Wood door frames and trim, interior of closets and wardrobes, unless otherwise specified to be stained.

1. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish

1st Coat - Alkyd Enamel Undercoat -- 2.0 Mils DFT

2nd & 3rd Coats - Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel -- 1.8 Mi ls DFT/each coat

G. Stained Woodwork (Transparent or semi-transpare nt finish to match

Architect's sample).



PAINTING 09 91 00 -11

1. Stained-Custom Grade Catalyzed Lacquer Finish:

Stain Coat - Oil Type -- 0.9 Mils DFT

1st Coat - Vinyl Sealer

Sand (220 grit

2nd & 3rd Coats - Catalyzed Lacquer -- 1.0 Mil DFT/ each coat

H. Interior Woodwork

American White Oak

1. 1 Coat Flat or Spar Varnish over specified prime coats; 1.1 Mils DFT.

I. Concrete Cellar Floors

Benjamin Moore Chex-Wear Epoxy-Ester Enamel M25

1st Coat - Primer

2nd & 3 rd Coat - Chex-Wear Epoxy-Ester Enamel M25


A. Verification of Conditions

l. The application of painter's finish to any surfa ce shall be taken to indicate that the Contractor considers such surf aces suitable for a first-class finish.

2. Do not apply painter's finish in any locations u ntil the Work

of other Contractors which might damage the new fin ish are completed.

3. Contractor check the compatibility of previously painted surface

with the new coating by applying a test panel 4' wi de x wall height. Allow to dry thoroughly; verify proper adh esion before proceeding with painting Work.

3.02 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Protection

In each area to be painted, cover and protect any a reas which do not receive new finishes from damage with clean cloths, heavy building paper or clean plastic covering secured in place. All protection is to be carefully removed, cleaned or discarded after painting is complete.

B. Removal of Existing Work to remain

1. Carefully remove all existing items to remain wh ich are not

scheduled to receive paint finish as necessary to p aint properly all surfaces. Restore the removed item to its origi nal condition.

C. Surface Preparation

1. Remove all loose paint with scraper and putty kn ife.



PAINTING 09 91 00 -12

2. Remove dust by washing with water, using damp sp onge or cloth.

3. If necessary, after washing, spot prime grease a nd water stains;

magic markers, crayon, lipstick marks, etc; with a quick-drying alcohol base primer sealer.

4. Apply an alkyd-based underbody for better adhesi on of semi-gloss

finish coats. Tint underbody to match color of fin ish coat.

5. Existing paint that was not removed with scraper and which appears to be sound shall receive spackling compoun d around perimeter high spots and feathered out so that surf ace is smooth. Repair gouges created by the scraping process and o ther imperfections in the existing surface with spacklin g compound to provide a smooth, even finished surface.

6. Apply alkyd-based underbody on all spackled area s.

7. Apply one finish coat, or as many as may be nece ssary to obtain

the proper finish, of alkyd flat, alkyd semi-gloss, or alkyd gloss paint on all surfaces as indicated in Interio r Paint Schedule.

8. Existing Metal:

a. Prepare surfaces as indicated in Subparagraphs 1 ., 2., 3.,

and 4., above.

b. Repair defects in surfaces to provide for an eve n plane in the new finish.

c. Apply alkyd-based underbody and one coat, or as many as

may be necessary to obtain the proper finish, of al kyd Semi-Gloss Paint.

9. Finish coats shall be "First Line" or "Top Quali ty" paints as

listed in the following:

a. CON-LUX Coatings Inc.: 900 Series (Semi-gloss); Luster Lite 2900 Series (egg-shell finish).

b. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Alkyd Sani-Flat (flat); A lkyd

Dulamel (Semi-Gloss).

c. Sherwin Williams Co.: Pro-Mar Alkyd Flat (flat) B32 WZ 1101 Series, Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss B34 WZ 1100 S eries.

d. Glidden Paints: Ultra Hide Alkyd flat; Spread L ustre

Semi-Gloss.

e. Pratt & Lambert: Lyt-All Flat; Satin Cellutone ( satin finish).

f. For surfaces requiring gloss paint finish as ind icated in

Painting Schedule, provide finish coats of "top qua lity" alkyd gloss enamel as manufactured by manufacturers listed in a., b., c., d. e., above.

10. Gypsum Board: Fill cracks and other blemishes with spackling

or patching compound and sand smooth.

11. Concrete and Concrete Unit Masonry: Prepare ce mentitious



PAINTING 09 91 00 -13

surfaces by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, gr ease and oils.

D. Materials Preparation

1. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with the

manufacturer's directions.

2. Stir materials before and during application to produce and maintain a mixture of uniform density. Do not stir any film which may form on the surface of materials into the mater ial; remove the film and strain the material before using.

3. Thinning: Use only thinners recommended by the paint

manufacturer and use only within the recommended or specified limits.

E. Moisture Meter Test

1. Do not apply initial coating until moisture cont ent of surface

is within limitations recommended by paint manufact urer.

2. Reading shall be approximately 8% on meter.

3. Test surfaces with moisture meter at various are as e.g.: Top, bottom and middle of wall, especially where piping occurs and at exterior walls, in the presence of the Authority .

3.04 APPLICATION

A. General

1. No Work shall be performed where cement or plast er is being applied or is in the process of drying.

2. No Work shall be performed in spaces which are n ot broom clean

and free of dust and waste.

3. Apply paint materials to produce smooth finished surfaces, free of brush or roller marks, drops, runs, or sags.

4. Paint materials shall be kept at a proper and un iform

consistency.

5. Thin only when necessary to achieve best results .

6. Thinners shall be turpentine, mineral spirits or material recommended by manufacturer of paint, and in quanti ty as recommended.

7. Excessive use of thinner as indicated by variati on in absorption,

lack of "hide", thickness of dry film, mottled or s treaky coat, shall be cause for rejection. Correct as directed.

8. Thinning of varnish or aluminum paint prohibited .

9. Apply all coats with brush or roller (spraying w ill not be

permitted) varying slightly the color of succeeding coats.

10. Brush out or roll on first or prime coat; work well into surface.

11. Each coat shall be inspected, approved and dry before proceeding with additional coats.



PAINTING 09 91 00 -14

12. Allow at least 48 hrs. for enamels and exterior oil paint to dry.

13. The surfaces of interior woods and metals shall be sanded or

rubbed between coats to assure smooth finish and pr oper adhesion of subsequent coats.

14. Avoid lapping of paint on glass, hardware, or o ther adjoining

surfaces.

15. Apply no paint to operating units where sliding contact of metals is necessary for proper functioning of unit.

16. Painting is not required on walls or ceilings i n concealed and

inaccessible areas, foundation spaces (except where scheduled), furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct sh afts and elevator shafts.

17. Moving parts of operating units will not requir e finish painting

unless otherwise required.

18. Do not paint over any code-required labels, suc h as Underwriter's Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomencl ature plate.

19. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges sa me as exterior

faces. 3.05 CLEANING

A. General

Contractor shall clean-up behind each paint crew su ch that painting and clean-up will be a continuous uninterrupted ope ration. The practice of one general clean-up after completion o f all painting will be strictly prohibited. This clean-up will include , but not be limited to the following:

1. Remove spots or defacement resulting from Work o f this Section.

2. Retouch all damaged surfaces to leave Work in pe rfect finished

condition.

3. If spots or defacement cannot be satisfactorily removed and retouched, re-finish the surfaces as directed.

4. Free all operating units of painted materials an d leave them

clean and in proper working order.

5. Remove from premises all surplus paint materials , debris and any other rubbish resulting from the Work.

6. Leave storage space clean and in condition requi red for

equivalent spaces in project. 3.06 PROTECTION

A. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly-paint ed finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others f or protection of their Work after completion of painting operations.

B. At the completion of Work of other trades, touch -up and restore all

damaged or defaced painted surfaces as directed by the Architect.



PAINTING 09 91 00 -15

--- END ---



GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK 23 05 12-1

SECTION 23 05 12 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED

A. Work Included: 1. The work includes providing all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests

necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified, including, but not limited to the following: a. Piping, fittings, and valves. b. Pipe insulation. c. Painting and pipe identification for all work by this Contractor is previously

specified under "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work". d. Test and balancing. e. Sleeves, pipe inserts and anchor bolts, escutcheons, prefabricated roof curbs, etc., as

hereinafter specified. f. Identification, name plates, tags and charts. g. Cutting and rough patching. h. Provide rental chiller. Tie-in rental chiller with the existing chiller plant and

provide new chilled water lines to existing buildings as indicated on Drawings. Provide deduct alternate to delete rental chiller and provide means for flow balancing as indicated in 23 05 93.

1.03 WORK INCLUDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS

A. The following work is included under other Sections of the Specifications: 1. Framed openings as shown on the Drawings. 2. Finish painting.


A. Perform work in accordance with quality established in Section 01 31 46 "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and hereinafter specified. All work performed shall comply with local codes.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings covering the following items: 1. Coordination drawings.




2. Schedule of piping and fitting materials. 3. Piping shop drawings. 4. Schedule of valves. 5. Thermometers and pressure gauges. 6. Schedule of insulation types and samples of each type. 7. Vibration isolation schedule.

B. All shop drawings being submitted that include electrical work shall be submitted with all internal and external wiring diagrams.

C. The previously listed items are major equipment and do not limit this Division's responsibility to submit shop drawings for all equipment and accessories which are to be provided under this Division of the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 LIST OF MANUFACTURERS

A. The manufacturer's name appearing first on this list is the manufacturer the project design was based upon. However, the additional manufacturers listed herein are also acceptable with the provision that they meet the requirements of these Specifications, ratings, and/or space allocations listed in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings. 1. Flow Measuring Devices

a. Barco Division; Aeroquip Corp. b. Pres O Ind. c. or approved equal

2. Thermometers & Pressure Gauges a. Ashcroft b. Weiss Instruments c. or as specified in Section 15801

3. Valves a. Jenkins b. Crane c. Walworth d. or as specified under paragraph on "Valves".

4. Insulation and Acoustic Lining a. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. b. CSG Snap-on c. Johns Manville d. or approved equal

5. Vibration Isolation a. VMC East b. Mason Industries c. Korfund Corp d. or approved equal

6. Rental Chiller a. Aggreko b. Trane c. Carrier




d. or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)




VALVES FOR HVAC 23 05 23-1

SECTION 23 05 23 VALVES FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.


1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Valves as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.


A. "Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Provide valves produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12, "Approved Manufacturer's List".

C. Provide valves whose performance under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.

D. To assure uniformity and compatibility, all grooved end valves and adjoining couplings shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 VALVES

A. Valves- General: All valves shall be of a design which the manufacturer lists for the service and shall be of materials allowed by the latest edition of the ASME Code for pressure piping for the pressure and temperature contemplated, unless a higher grade or quality is herein specified. All valves of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer, except for special applications.




B. The system shall be supplied with valves in all branch mains and risers, at all pumps, tanks, reducing and control valves, heating and cooling surfaces and at all apparatus; so located, arranged and operated as to give complete shut-off. Except where flanged valves are used, each connection to equipment shall be made with screwed unions, flanged unions, or grooved couplings on the equipment or discharge side of the valve.

C. All valves shall be installed and arranged so that they are easily accessible.

D. Each valve shall have the maker's name or brand, the figure or list number and the guaranteed working pressure cast on the body or stamped on the bonnet, or shall be provided with other means of easy identification.

E. Provide valve operating chain on all gate, globe, butterfly and plug valves in Mechanical Equipment Rooms - 4" and larger, which are more than 7'-0" above the operating floor. Unit shall be complete with adjustable sprocket, chain and guide (Crane "Babbit" type). Provide hook to keep chain out of the way.

F. All flanged-end valves shall have renewable metal seat rings and discs. On gate valves these parts shall be of bronze, on all globe valves they shall be of bronze and suitable for throttling service.

G. Grooved-end valves may be used in lieu of threaded, flanged, lug or wafer valves, if and where grooved end piping is used. All grooved-end valves shall be complete with grooved ends for use with mechanical couplings of the same manufacturer. Valve sealing elastomer shall be of the same composition as the adjoining coupling gaskets. 1. Grooved End Butterfly Valves:

a. 2"-12": ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron body and disc, with integrally cast stem. Disc shall be nickel-plated. Body coated with.Black enamel. Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSeal™.

b. 14"-24": ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron body and disc. Disc and body PPS coated. Mounted elastomer seal with stainless steel stem. Victaulic Series Victaulic Vic-300 AGS (300 psi max).

c. 2-1/2”–6”: Copper tube dimensioned bronze body, EPDM encapsulated ductile iron disc, integrally cast stem. Victaulic Series 608.

2. Grooved end check valves shall be ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron body, with stainless steel spring and shaft. Victaulic Series 716H and 716. a. 2" - 3": Ductile iron body with stainless steel disc, mounted elastomer seal, and

nickel-plated seat. b. 4"-12": Black enamel coated ductile iron body, elastomer encapsulated ductile

iron disc, with welded-in nickel seat. c. 14”-24”: ASTM A395 ductile iron body, stainless steel disc, spring, and shaft,

EPDM seat bonded to the valve body, AGS grooved ends. Victaulic Series W715.

H. All valves shall have their bonnets back-seated to provide for packing under pressure. All gate valves shall be of the solid tapered wedge type.

I. No Asbestos shall be used in construction of valves including the gaskets.

J. All valves shall be of type and number as specified below: For all services, except as otherwise noted.




TYPE SIZE NIBCO

NO. CRANE

NO. VICTAULIC

NO. JENKINS

NO. WALWORTH

NO. ABZ No.

REMARKS

Butterfly Valve (High Performance)

2 ½” & Larger

LCS-6822 LCS-7822

Vic-300 MasterSeal Vic-300 AGS

400 Series 300 psi Grooved DI, EPDM 285 psi Lug, DI, SS Disc, EPDM

2.02 HIGH PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly valves may be used for as an alternative to gate valves for sizes 2½" and above for chilled water, and condenser water only.

B. Valves shall be similar to ABZ Valves & Controls Fig. 402-100 (ANSI Class 150) or Fig. 422-100 (ANSI Class 300) lug type body; or similar to NIBCO Fig. # LCS6822 (ANSI Class 150) or NIBCO Fig. # LCS7822 (ANSI Class 300). Butterfly valves shall not be directly connected to equipment without a spool piece. All valves shall be capable of bi-directional dead end service.

C. Valves in insulated piping shall have necks extending 2" above the flange to accommodate full thickness of insulation.

D. Operators: 1. Valves to 4" shall have lever operators with 10 locking positions and adjustable memory

stop. 2. Valves larger than 4" shall be equipped with manual hand wheel gear operators. 3. In Mechanical Equipment Rooms, provide chain wheel operators on all valves located at

or above 7'-0" AFF.

E. Bodies: Shall be A216-WCB carbon steel lug style.

F. Stems: Shall be 17-4PH stainless steel for maximum strength and corrosion resistance and must be blow out.

G. Discs: Shall be 316 stainless steel and double offset for tight shutoff, ease of operation and maximum seat life.

H. Seats: Shall be of reinforced PTFE and held in place by bolted on seat retainers to assure bi-directional dead end service. Seats retained by spring clips are not acceptable.

I. Shaft Bushings: Shall be PTFE impregnated 316 stainless steel on either side of the disc.

J. Packing: Shall be underneath drawn design to allow direct mounting of actuators eliminating brackets and couplings. Packing shall be a stack of multiple PTFE rings.

K. Design Working Pressure: Fig 401-100 is 285 psi; Fig. 422-100 is 740 psi.

L. Factory Test Pressure: 120% of above working pressures.

M. Dead End Test: 100% of above working pressures.




N. Where high performance butterfly valves are used in piping with mechanical couplings (Victaulic, etc.), provide transition fittings from grooved couplings to flanges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where valves are to be installed and determine space conditions and notify architect in writing of conditions determined to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves where shown or specified, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that valves comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Install a manually operated bypass globe valve around all control valves (motorized or self-contained regulators).1

C. Contractor is responsible for final valve orientation. Valves shall be installed in such a manner to avoid leakage through their stem seals, while still orienting valve handles to provide suitable accessibility and operability. Valve orientation shall be in compliance with the valve manufacturer’s installation instructions. Valve handle orientation shall be indicated on the piping shop drawings. Valves orientation and handles not shown on the piping shop drawings will be subject to possible removal and reorientation in the field based on the Engineer’s observations following the completion of construction.

D. Coordinate with other work as necessary to prevent interference of valves with other components of systems.


A. Upon completion of installation of valves, test valves to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning valves, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.




HVAC SPECIALTIES 23 05 80-1

SECTION 23 05 80

HVAC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all HVAC Specialties as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.


A. Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of this equipment with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.

B. Provide products produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12, entitled "Approved Manufacturers List".

C. Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION


1.06 GUARANTEE





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 THERMOMETERS

A. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings and where specified herein, separable well-type dial or 9" mercury adjustable angle type in glass stem, thermometers, Model 50 EI60E as manufactured by Ashcroft or approved equal.

B. All thermometers shall be installed in such a manner as to cause a minimum of restriction to flow in the pipes and so that they can easily be read from the floor.

C. Dial thermometers shall be 5 inch hermetically sealed, bimetal with stainless steel cases, antiparallax dials with raised jet black figures, stainless steel stems, and separable sockets (wells) unless otherwise specified.

D. Thermometers for duct mounting shall have union connections in lieu of separable wells.

E. Separable wells shall be stainless steel for use in steel pipe and brass for use in copper pipe. Separable wells shall be standard type for uninsulated pipe and lagging extension type of proper length for insulated pipe. Stem shall extend a minimum of 32" into the fluid, or 75% of inside clear diameter for smaller size pipes.

F. The accuracy of all thermometers shall be within 1% of the full scale range.

G. Where conditions are such that thermometers would not be readable from the floor, remote bulb dial thermometers shall be mounted on panelboards. The thermometers shall be 5 inch dials and shall be vapor actuated. The thermometers shall have separable wells. Panel mounted thermometers shall be provided with an engraved nameplate mounted below each thermometer to identify its service. The nameplates shall be chrome plated with black filled letters.

H. Thermometers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings.

I. The scale range for the thermometers shall be as follows:

Service Temperature

Range Remarks Chilled Water 0E to 120EF

Condenser Water 0E to 120EF

2.02 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings and where specified herein, 4½” Model 1279 pressure gauges with phenolic casings as manufactured by Ashcroft. Process connection shall be ½” MNPT. Acceptable equals include Weiss Model LF4UGY1 or Noshok Model 660.

B. Gauges shall be liquid filled for systems under 150°F (chilled water, condenser water, fuel oil, etc.) and shall be dry for all heating systems (hot water, steam, condensate, etc.).

C. All gauges shall have black phenolic casings. The gauges shall have white faces with black filled engraved numerals and adjustable pointer. The diameter of the dial shall be 42 inches. Gauges shall have brass bronzed brushed rotary type movement.




D. The accuracy of all gauges shall be within 2% of the scale range.

E. All gauges on water lines shall be fitted with filter type pressure snubbers consisting of d" dia. x c" thick, micro metallic stainless steel filter, as manufactured by Operating and Maintenance Specialties or approved equal. All gauges on steam lines shall be fitted with siphon tubes.

F. A stainless steel bar stock block-and-bleed type needle valve shall be installed on the fluid side of each gauge, similar to Noshok Model Series 704MFS (size ½”). A stainless steel bar stock block-and-bleed type needle valve with a siphon tube shall be installed on the system side of each steam and HTHW gauge.

G. All gauges shall be installed so as to be easily readable from the floor. Where conditions are such that gauges on piping would not be readable from the floor, the gauges shall be installed on panelboards.

H. Panel mounted gauges shall be designed for flush mounting with back connections and shall be provided with an engraved nameplate mounted below each gauge to identify its service. The nameplates shall be chrome plated with black filled letters.

I. Pressure gauges shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings.

J. The scale range of pressure gauges shall be as follows:

Service Pressure Range

Chilled Water 0 to 100 PSIG

Condenser Water 0 to 100 PSIG

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where these specialties are to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install HVAC Specialties where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that HVAC Specialties comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of HVAC Specialties with other components of systems.





A. Upon completion of installation of HVAC Specialties, test HVAC Specialties to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.





TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93-1

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary

General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.



A. All piping and equipment shall be tested. Labor including standby electrician, materials,

instruments and power required for testing shall be furnished unless otherwise indicated under

the particular Section of the Specification.

B. In no case shall piping, equipment, or accessories be subjected to pressure exceeding their ratings.

C. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the

particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Architects.

D. Any damage resulting from tests to any and all trades shall be repaired and damaged materials

replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all authorities having jurisdiction, but in no case

less than the time prescribed below.

F. Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons of the year shall be tested

during the appropriate season. Tests shall be performed on individual equipment, systems, and

their controls. Whenever the equipment or system under test is interrelated and depends upon the

operation of other equipment, systems and controls for proper operation, functioning and

performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system being

tested.

G. All pumps and piping systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of plug cocks,

globe valves or other control devices, to obtain flow quantities indicated on the design drawings

for the temporary outdoor chiller.

H. Upon completion of the work, a test shall be conducted in the presence and under the direction of

a NYS Licensed Professional Engineer, retained by the Contractor, and qualified to conduct such

tests.


A. Prior to installation of the mechanical systems, engage the services of an independent air and

water balancing firm that shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The firm shall have

no affiliation with a mechanical contracting or sheetmetal company. Balancing and testing





company shall be a member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), National

Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB) or Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB).

The balancing firm shall have at least one member of its full time staff who is a licensed

professional engineer who shall supervise the balancing work. Prior to balancing, a list of

instruments to be used shall be submitted to the Architect. All instruments shall be calibrated

within six months before tests.

B. Prior to installation of the mechanical systems, the licensed Professional Engineer for the

Balancing and Testing Company shall review the contract documents to confirm that all balancing

devices are provided to allow for complete balancing of the air and water systems for the project.

The Balancing and Testing Company shall submit a letter confirming that they have performed

this review and identifying any issues.

After the mechanical systems are installed, the PE for the Balancing and Testing Company shall

perform a review of the installation to verify that the required balancing devices have been

installed and that the systems are ready for balancing. The Balancing and Testing Company shall

submit a letter confirming that the inspection has been performed and that the system is ready for

balancing.

Both letters shall be signed and sealed by the Balancing and Testing Company’s Professional

Engineer.

C. When all specified testing and balancing procedures have been completed, a written report shall

be submitted to the Architect for review. The report shall be tabulated in standard AABC/TABB

format. As part of the Architect's review process, the accuracy of the balancing report shall be

field spot checked on a random basis, with the assistance of the balancing firm's project

supervisor. The HVAC Contractor shall reimburse the Architect for all time spent in excess of

eight working hours, to demonstrate the accuracy of the balancing report.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work". Submit

all test and balancing reports as described hereinafter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD TEST OF PIPING

A. During construction properly cap or plug all lines to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. The

system of piping shall be blown through wherever necessary after completion (for the purpose of

removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from all equipment and piping), for as long a time as is required to

thoroughly clean the apparatus.

B. Use anti-freeze solution for piping to be tested in winter.

C. All piping shall be tested as hereinafter specified. Tests shall be made after erection and before

covering is applied or piping painted or concealed, and as sections of mains and groups of risers





are completed. The extent of the work completed before pressure tests are made shall be

determined by the Engineer.

D. All piping, unless otherwise specified, shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure at least 1-1/2 times

the maximum designed working pressure (but not less than 50 lbs. per square inch) for a

sufficiently long time to detect all leaks and defects; and after testing shall be made tight in the

most approved manner. Tests shall be repeated once after leaks and defects have been repaired.

When automatic control valves, equipment and similar devices which are incapable of

withstanding test pressures applied to piping, such devices shall be removed, or otherwise

protected during tests. After approval of such tests, devices shall be installed and tested with

operating medium to operating pressures. The following shall be tested for four consecutive hours

and proved tight. Leaks shall be remedied by replacing defective work.

Hydrostatic

Item Field Test Chilled water 100 psi

Condenser water 100 psi

E. Leaks appearing during the various pressure tests shall be corrected by replacing all defective

materials or welds and subsequent tests shall be made until the piping is found perfect. Caulking

of screwed joints or pending of welds is prohibited. Wherever it is necessary to cut out a weld

and the ends of the pipe cannot be conveniently brought together, then a short piece of pipe shall

be fitted in and welded as approved by the Architect.

F. Provide all other tests required by the Building Department, Fire Department and all other

Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

3.02 RUNNING TEST OF PIPING SYSTEMS

A. When directed, any section of the work, after it has been completed and otherwise satisfactorily

tested, shall be put in actual operation and operated for a period of two (2) days of 24 hours each,

during which time any defects which may appear shall be remedied and any adjustment which

may be necessary shall be made.

B. During the time of the tests, repack all valves, make all adjustments and otherwise put the

apparatus in perfect condition for operation, and instruct the Owner's representative in the use and

management of the apparatus.

3.03 RUNNING TEST OF TEMPORARY WATER COOLED CHILLER

A. After the rental chiller piping and accessories have been connected, run the entire system for an

8-hour period. During this time, introduce upsets in all control devices to check their operation.

After all devices have been tested and control system proved to function satisfactorily, reset the

controls to the proper settings as directed by the Engineer. The test of the overall performance

shall be done in the presence of the chiller manufacturer and the Owner's representatives for two

(2) different arrangements: 1) Rental chiller runs without building chillers. Chillers CH-1 and

CH-2 are off and shut-off valves on condenser and evaporator of the chiller are closed. Condenser

water pump CW-1 and chilled water pump CHW-1 are ON. Pumps CW-2 and CHW-2 are OFF.

2 Rental chiller runs with building chiller CH-1. Chiller CH-2 is OFF and shut-off valves on

condenser and evaporator of the chiller are closed. Condenser water pumps CW-1, CW-2 and

chilled water pumps CHW-1 and CHW-2 are ON. After the controls have been tested and proved





satisfactory, the system shall be run under automatic control and the following data shall be

logged:

1. Outside wet bulb temperature.

2. Chilled water supply and return temperatures.

3. Ampere nameplate rating of each motor.

4. Actual ampere reading and voltage for each motor.

5. Condenser water supply and return temperatures.

6. Compressor suction pressure and temperatures.

7. Compressor discharge pressure and temperatures.

8. Suction and discharge pressure at each pump.

9. Water pressure drop across condenser and chiller.

10. Water pressure drop across water strainers when the strainers are clean.

11. Water flow to rental chiller on condenser and chiller water pipe.

12. Water pressure drop across flexible hoses.

3.04 EQUIPMENT TEST

A. Demonstrate that all equipment and apparatus fulfill the requirements of the Specifications and

that all equipment shall be operated and tested for rated capacities and specified characteristics.

Voltage and amperage readings shall be taken on all electric motors.

3.05 TEST PREPARATION AND PROCEDURE

A. The chilled water and condenser water systems for operation of the temporary chiller shall be

completely filled and vented, and all strainers cleaned prior to balancing. Inspect expansion tanks

for proper water level and operating of makeup water valves.

3.06 WATER BALANCE

A. Record the following design requirements for all pumps and pump motors:

1. Water quantity - GPM

2. Total head - feet of water

3. Pump speed - RPM

4. Impeller size

5. NPSH (if required)

6. Motor horsepower

7. Volts, phases, cycles and amps at design conditions

B. Record the following data from all pumps motors installed at the project:

1. Manufacturer, model and size.

2. Impeller size

3. Motor horsepower, service factor and RPM

4. Volts, phases, cycles and full load amps

5. Motor starter and heaters size

6. Equipment location

C. All pumps and piping systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of plug cocks,

globe valves or other control devices, to obtain the flow quantities indicated on the Drawings.

Balancing shall be done with all controls set for full flow through coils. All automatic throttling





valves shall be in the full-open position. All automatic three-way valves shall have the bypass

port closed.

D. Record the following test data for all pumps and pump motors installed at the Project:

1. Pump speed - RPM

2. Total head at shut-off and dead-end discharge - feet of water. (Plot this value on pump

curve as a verification of impeller size.) 3. Suction, discharge and total head at final adjusted flow - feet of water.

E. Balance the water flow through all chillers, in accordance with design requirements.

F. For all orifice plates, record the pipe size, orifice size, flow factor, required differential pressure,

final differential pressure and calculated final flow quantity.

G. For all venturi type, pitot tube, or other flow measuring devices record the pipe size, manufacturer

and size of device, and the direct reading or the differential pressure, and calculated final flow.

H. Flow shall be balanced through all equipment and coils by means of balancing and flow

measuring valves provided. In addition pressure drop shall be measured and curves obtained

from the various manufacturers indicating the relationship between flow and pressure drop

through the coils and equipment. Readings shall be taken on calibrated test gauges. Submit

curves with the final report. Final report shall document all flow and pressure drop measurements.

I. Balance pumps to their design flow rate, within 100% and 110% of design, so long as pump and

motor rating permits. Balance flow through all coils and terminal units to ±10% of design flow

rate.

J. Upon completion of the water balance, reconcile the total heat transfer through all coils by

recording the entering and leaving water temperatures and the entering and leaving air dry bulb

and wet bulb temperatures.

K. Upon completion of balancing, adjust all differential bypasses and three-way valve bypasses for

the same pressure drop or full bypass as on full flow.

L. If the Bid Alternate for deleting renting the temporary chiller for testing is not accepted by the

Owner, provide a test rig, consisting of calibrated orifice plates, hoses and valves as needed to

simulate the installation of a temporary chiller and to allow for balancing of both chilled water

and condenser water flows to future chiller rentals which may be installed.




INSULATION FOR HVAC WORK 23 07 00-1

SECTION 23 07 00 INSULATION FOR HVAC WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. The work includes furnishing and installing all labor, materials, equipment, accessories and services necessary to provide Piping Insulation installation, which is complete in every respect and of the composition and quality as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.


A. "Installer": A firm with at least ten 10 years successful installation experience on projects with piping and ductwork insulation similar to that required for this project.

B. All insulation shall have composite (including insulation jacket or facing and adhesive) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: 1. Flame Spread 25 2. Smoke Developed 50 3. Fuel Contributed 50

C. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and cloths for fittings shall have component ratings as listed above. All products shall bear UL labels indicating the above are not exceeded.

D. Provide certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these Specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength.

E. Provide products produced by the manufacturers which are listed in Section 15600, "Approved Manufacturers List"

F. Insulation Materials: Insulating materials manufacturing facilities must be certified and registered with an approved registrar for conformance with ISO9000 quality standard.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and submit shop drawings and samples.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46 - "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".




1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site.

B. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory-fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp, or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products.

C. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COLD AND DUAL TEMPERATURE PIPING INSULATION

A. Chilled and condenser water supply and return piping shall be covered with 1 ½” fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier.

B. Insulation shall be glass fiber complying with ASTM C547, Type I with a maximum K factor of 0.23 BTU in/hr ft2 F at 75 degrees F. mean temperature with factory-applied all service vapor barrier jacket with self seal lap meeting the requirement of ASTM C-1136 Type I.

C. Insulation shall be heavy density fiberglass sectional pipe insulation as made by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. or Johns-Manville Micro-Lok fiberglass insulation.

D. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off at all flanges, fittings, valves and at intervals of 21 feet on continuous runs of pipe, with Foster fire-resistant vapor barrier coating Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34 or equal.

E. All fittings, valves and flanges for pipe sizes smaller than 4" shall be insulated with molded fiberglass fittings of same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation, secured with No. 20 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire and covered with Zeston 2000 25/50 PVC as made by Johns Manville, applied per manufacturer=s recommendation.

F. All fittings, valves and flanges for pipe sizes 4" and larger shall be insulated with fabricated mitered segments of pipe insulation of same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation, secured with No. 20 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire and covered with Zeston 2000 25/50 PVC fitting covers as made by Johns Manville installed per manufacturer’s recommendation.

G. Finish for Exposed Pipe Insulation: 1. The term “exposed” is hereby defined as any place outdoors, as well as any place indoors

in Mechanical Rooms, Storage Rooms, Janitor’s Closets, etc., where located within 7 feet of floor or access platforms.

2. All exposed outdoor pipe, valve and fittings insulation shall have 0.016 inch thick corrugated aluminum jacket banded with 2" s.s. bands spaced 12 inches o.c. Piping, fittings and valves exposed in building, within seven feet of the floor or access platform, shall have 0.016" thick aluminum jacket banded with 2" aluminum bands spaced 18" o.c. or two bands per section. Joints and jacket shall provide complete weatherproof protection either by mechanical contact or by use of Foster 95-44 or Childers CP-76 metal jacketing sealant (gallon cans only; no tubes).




3. All calcium silicate pipe insulation, all insulated condenser water piping exposed to weather and all other insulated pipe exposed to weather shall have 0.016 inch thick aluminum jacket banded with 2" s.s. bands spaced 12" o.c. This shall include pipe, fittings and valves.

H. All below ambient, coated molded fittings and mitered segments shall be vapor sealed with a layer of open weave glass fabric embedded between two 1/16" thick coats of Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34 vapor barrier coating and lap seal at least 1" for molded type and 2" for mitered type on itself and adjoining insulation.

I. Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hanger shall pass outside of a metal saddle which shall support a section of high density insulation equal thickness to adjacent insulation (such as calcium silicate) and of sufficient length to support pipe without crushing insulation. (See table below.) Hangers shall not pierce insulation and all vapor barriers shall be unbroken and continuous.

Pipe Size Saddle & Insert Length

12"- 2" 10" Long

3"-6" 12" Long

8"-10" 16" Long

12" & Over 22" Long

J. At pipe supports, insulation shield protection saddles and matching hanger shall be used.

K. All strainers for chilled water and insulated condenser water piping shall be insulated and boxed in with galvanized sheet metal cover. The insulated metal covers shall be segmented and shall be made removable.

L. As an alternative to fiberglass insulation, on cold pipes, elastomeric closed-cell insulation may be used. 1. Insulation material shall be a flexible, closed-cell elastomeric insulation in tubular or sheet

form: AP Armaflex, AP Armaflex W, AP Armaflex SS, or AP Armaflex SA. These products meet the requirements as defined in ASTM C 534, “Specification for preformed elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in sheet and tubular form.”

2. Insulation materials shall have a closed-cell structure to prevent moisture from wicking which makes it an efficient insulation.

3. Insulation material shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s, HFC’s or HCFC’s. It is also formaldehyde free, low VOC’s, fiber free, dust free and resists mold and mildew.

4. The insulation material shall contain MICOBAN Antimicrobial additive to aid in the prevention of mold and mildew.

5. Materials shall have a flame spread index of less than 25 and a smoke-developed index of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, latest revision. In addition, the product, when tested, shall not melt or drip flaming particles, the flame shall not be progressive and all materials shall pass simulated end-use fire tests.

6. Materials shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.25 Btu-in./h-ft2- °F at a 75°F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518, latest revisions.

7. Materials shall have a maximum water vapor transmission of 0.05 perm-inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A, latest revision.




8. The material shall be manufactured under an independent third party supervision testing program covering the properties of fire performance, thermal conductivity and water vapor transmission.

9. Valves, Flanges and Fittings: a. Armacell Fabricated Fittings can be used on all fittings. 2 and 3 Pieces 90s, 45s, Ts,

P traps and couplings along with grooved fittings are available. b. All fittings shall be insulated with the same insulation thickness as the adjacent

piping. All seam and mitered joints shall be adhered with Armaflex 520, 520 BLV or 520 Black Adhesive. Screwed fittings shall be sleeved and adhered with a minimum 1” overlap onto the adjacent insulation. Armaflex HT 625 Adhesive shall be used with UT Solaflex.

c. Valves, flanges, strainers, and Grooved couplings shall be insulated using Armaflex donuts that shall then be covered with sheet or oversized tubular insulation.

10. Adhesives and Finishes a. Adhesive shall be the insulation manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive:

Armaflex 520, Armaflex 520 BLV, Armaflex 520 Black, Low VOC Spray Adhesive or Armaflex HT 625 Adhesive.

b. Insulation finish shall be the insulation manufacturer's recommended finish: Armaflex WB Finish.

c. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same properties as listed above and shall not detract from any of the system ratings as specified above.

2.02 PVC INSULATED FITTING COVERS

A. The Contractor shall use Zeston 2000 25/50 rated PVC covers as made by Johns Manville or approved equal.

B. Cold Systems: Fittings shall be insulated by applying the proper factory precut Hi-Lo Temp insulation insert to the pipe fitting. The ends of the Hi-Lo Temp insulation insert shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked in, fully insulating the pipe fitting. All fittings and elbows shall be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh before PVC covers are applied.

C. A vapor barrier mastic compatible with the PVC shall be applied around the edges of the adjoining pipe insulation and on the fitting cover throat overlap seam. The PVC fitting cover is then applied and shall be secured with pressure sensitive pearl gray Z-Tape along the circumferential edges. The tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and have an overlap on itself at least 2" on the downward side.

D. 2 or more layers of the Hi-Lo Temp insulation inserts shall be applied with the first layer being secured with a few wrappings of fiberglass yarn.

E. Cold systems located outdoors: Fittings shall be insulated to a full thickness the same as the adjacent pipe insulation, with insulation which has been mitered. An intermediate vapor barrier shall be applied, completely sealing the insulation and on the fitting cover overlap seam. 0.016" aluminum cladding shall be applied and shall be secured with pressure sensitive pearl gray Z-Tape along the throat seam and the circumferential edges overlapping itself 2" on the downward side with aluminum bands on 12” intervals.




F. Qualifications for Using Insulation: When the pipe insulation thickness is greater than 12" or the pipe temperature is greater than 250EF or less than 45EF, additional insulation inserts should be used. Use one Hi-Lo Temp insert for each additional 1" of pipe insulation.

G. Fitting cover: The temperature of the PVC fitting cover must be kept below 150EF by the use of proper thickness of insulation and by keeping the PVC cover away from contact with, or exposure to, sources of direct or radiant heat.

H. Where insulated piping is exposed (up to 7 feet above the floor or platform) or any place outdoors, the PVC covers shall be omitted since the use of 0.016” thick aluminum cladding is required on all piping, fittings and valves.

2.03 PIPING EXPOSED TO FREEZING

A. Insulation on any piping, fitting, flange and valve located in areas exposed to freezing (in unheated areas, at cooling towers and where noted on the Drawings as to provide "Frost Insulation") shall, in addition to above covering, be increased by one inch with the same finish as specified for the particular service when not subject to freezing. Insulation shall always be a minimum of 22" inches in thickness.

B. Weatherproofing of Piping: 1. Weatherproof all insulated outdoor piping. 2. Where weatherproofing is required, in addition to insulation and finishes specified for

frostproofing, cover with Tedlar Film Jackets as made by ALPHA Assoc, Inc. (Woodbridge N.J.).

3. Fittings insulation shall be heavily coat with Childers CP-10/11 or Foster 46-50 weather barrier mastic for hot piping; Childers CP-34 or Foster 30-65 vapor barrier coating for cold piping. Embed into the wet coat a layer of open weave glass cloth and finish with a second coat of same mastic over entire surface.

4. In addition to insulation and finishes specified for frostproof, cover all piping, including fittings and valves, with corrugated aluminum sheet cladding, 0.016 inch thick with lock seams at longitudinal seams, and preformed straps at transverse joints at 12” intervals. Joints and jacket shall provide complete weatherproof protection either by mechanical contact or by use of Foster 95-44 or Childers CP-76 metal jacketing sealant (gallon cans only; no tubes).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where this insulation is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of insulation with other components of systems.

C. All insulating materials shall be applied only by experienced workmen, in accordance with the best covering practice. All piping, duct or equipment shall be blown out, cleaned, tested and painted prior to the application of any covering. Adhesives, sealers and mastics shall not be applied, when the ambient temperature is below 40EF, or surfaces that are wet.

D. Insulation for factory-fabricated air handling units, furnished as part of units.

E. At all openings in insulation and acoustical duct lining, insulate edges neatly and protect with sheet metal nosing. Use sealant as well.

F. All items described in general indicate the type of covering required, however, all piping, ductwork or equipment that transmits heat or will form condensation shall be insulated.

G. Finish for Concealed Pipe Insulation: 1. Factory ASJ (All service jacket) secured in place with Bostich staples 4" o.c. or ASJ with

self sealing lap as made by Johns Manville, Owens-Corning or approved equal. All fittings shall be covered with Zeston PVC covers.

H. All piping insulation shall be continuous through non-fire rated ceiling openings and sleeves passing through non-fire rated walls or floors. Sleeves shall be packed with mineral wool or thermofiber. Discontinue insulation as it passes through fire-rated wall or floor and use mineral wool or thermofiber packing instead. Specific mastics, adhesives and coating shall be applied in strict accordance with Manufacturer's instruction, including recommended coverages.

I. Where packaged type units are called for in the Specifications, or as scheduled on the Drawings, the insulation shall be as herein specified for the specific system.

J. All valved and capped outlets left for future work shall be insulated as herein specified for the specific systems with a removable section of insulation over caps.

K. Where insulation on existing piping, equipment, etc., has been cut, removed or damaged, this Contractor shall reinsulate as herein specified.

L. Finish for Exposed Insulation: 1. The term “exposed” is hereby defined as any place outdoors, as well as any place indoors

in Mechanical Rooms, Storage Rooms, Janitor’s Closets, etc., where located within 7 feet of floor or access platforms.

2. All exposed outdoor pipe, valve and fittings insulation shall have 0.016 inch thick corrugated aluminum jacket banded with 2" s.s. bands spaced 12 inches o.c. Piping, fittings and valves exposed in building, within seven feet of the floor or access platform, shall have 0.016" thick aluminum jacket banded with 2" aluminum bands spaced 18" o.c. or two bands per section. Joints and jacket shall provide complete weatherproof protection




either by mechanical contact or by use of Foster 95-44 or Childers CP-76 metal jacketing sealant (gallon cans only; no tubes).

3. All calcium silicate pipe insulation, all insulated condenser water piping exposed to weather and all other insulated pipe exposed to weather shall have 0.016 inch thick aluminum jacket banded with 2" s.s. bands spaced 12" o.c. This shall include pipe, fittings and valves.

4. As an alternative to the use of 0.016” aluminum cladding on outdoor duct insulation, if AP Armaflex insulation is used, the ArmaTuff laminated sheet and roll insulation may be used. ArmaTuff laminated Armaflex sheet and roll insulations may be used for insulating exterior applications such as duct, tanks, vessels and large pipes. Refer to section 3.06 for further installation details. ArmaTuff is a laminate of white polymeric material on Armaflex insulations, which offers durability and resistance to weathering, ultraviolet, acid rain and chemicals. The laminate is 0.013 inches (13 mils) thick. The seams must be installed in compression and sealed with Armaflex 520, or 520 Black contact adhesive. Cover the seams using ArmaTuff 6” Seal Tape.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. The installer of the insulation shall advise the Contractor of required protection for the insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.




PIPING FOR HVAC 23 20 00-1

SECTION 23 20 00 PIPING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. The Work includes providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all piping as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.


A. "Manufacturers"-Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipe whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.

B. Provide pipe whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.

C. Piping systems and installation of piping shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, Building Service Piping (B31.1, Power Piping).

Refrigerant piping systems shall comply with ANSI/ASME (B31.5, Refrigeration Piping).

D. All piping and fittings shall be made in the USA and shall be labeled as such. Piping shall also be labeled with ASTM number for easy identification/verification at the site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and submit shop drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".

B. Furnish fabrication detail drawings for all pipe hangers and supports for piping 22 inches nominal size and larger.

C. Furnish hanger and support location drawings for piping 22 inches nominal size and larger.

D. Perform calculations necessary for the design and selection of hangers, supports, anchors, guides, restraints, snubbers, and supplementary supporting steel for piping 22 inches nominal size and larger.




E. Perform weight distribution, expansion and movement calculations for all piping.

F. Shop Drawings and Data: Contractor shall prepare the following drawings: 1. Fabrication Detail Shop Drawings: These drawings shall show each pipe hanger or

support for piping 22 inches nominal size and larger and shall include location of hanger with reference to nearest building columns or beams, arrangements and detail of hanger, detail of concrete anchor or detail of welded or bolted attachment to structural steel, bill of materials for all components with ASTM specification numbers and direction and magnitude of movement and thrusts and weight at hanger point. Provide the load at each concrete anchor.

2. Piping Erection Detail and Layout Drawings: Provide scaled detailed piping arrangement drawings showing all piping systems and connected components. Indicate piping in double line detail for all piping 2" and larger. Show piping with insulation thicknesses. Indicate all valves and valve handles, automatic actuators, strainers and access space, reducers, instruments, anchors/guides and supports, seismic components (if applicable) and all equipment to which piping is connected.

3. Hanger and Support Location Shop Drawings: Contractor shall mark all pipe hanger and support locations for piping 22 inches nominal size and larger on Piping Erection Detail and Layout drawings. Contractor shall also show all structural grids and support points on these drawings.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01 31 46, "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. All pipe shall be new, free from scale or rust, of the material and weight specified under the various services. Each length of pipe shall be properly marked at the mill for proper identification with name or symbol of manufacturer.

B. All steel piping, except where otherwise rated, shall be standard or extra strong weight, in conformance with the ASTM A-53 Grade B seamless, for piping 2" and larger, as manufactured by National Tube Division, Republic Steel Corp., or approved equal. Piping shall be ASTM A-53 Type F continuous butt weld, for piping less than 2".

C. All galvanized steel piping shall be standard or extra strong weight, as specified, in conformance with the ASTM A-53 Grade B. Pipe shall be hot-dripped zinc-coated with Prime Western smelter and not wiped.

D. Generally, unless otherwise specified, joints in steel piping of sizes 2 inches and under shall be screwed, and all sized 22 inches and over shall be welded or flanged. Brass pipe shall be screwed 2 inches and smaller and flanged 22 inches and over. Copper tubing shall be silver-soldered or 95-5 solder as herein specified.

E. Screwed Piping




1. All connections to apparatus with screwed piping shall be made with 250 pound brass seat unions.

2. All screwed nipples shall be Schedule 80 nipples.

F. Welding Piping 1. All fittings for welded piping shall be as manufactured by Tube Turn, Grinnell, Bonney

Forge or equal as approved by the Architect. The fittings shall be of the same weight and material as the piping to which they are attached.

2. For piping 22" or 4" and larger, full size branch connection shall be made with manufactured welding tees, branch connections for less than full size, shall be made with welding tees or with Weldolet forged branch outlet fittings. Fishmouthing, shaped nipples, and stubbing not permitted.

G. Welding outlet fittings shall be Weldolets as manufactured by Bonney Forge, Inc., or approved equal 2 or 3 and smaller branches shall be made with thredolets as made by Bonney Forge or approved equal.

H. Weld ells shall have a center line radius not less than diameter of the pipes.

I. All flanges shall be welding neck flanges ANSI B16.5 ASTM 181 Grade I. All systems, except where otherwise noted - 150 lbs. Class, forged steel.

J. Instrumentation connections :" and smaller on all systems shall be provided by welding threaded 2000# forged steel half couplings to the pipe.

K. All pipe to be welded shall be cut off clean and beveled. All welding shot shall be removed.

L. Composition of welding electrodes shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

M. Backing rings shall be used for all welded piping for high temperature hot water. High temperature hot water piping to be butt welded in sizes 2" and larger, socket welded in sizes 12" and smaller. Rings shall be carbon steel with knock off spacer pins, for Schedule 40 and/or Schedule 80 pipe dimensions, as manufactured by Tube Turn, Inc. or Robven Backing Ring Co. Smaller branches on high temperature hot water shall be made by using "Weldolets" or approved equal fittings. Ells for high temperature hot water system shall be long radius. All flanges shall be welding neck flanges ASA B16,5 ASTM 181 Grade L,300 lbs. Class, forged steel.

N. Pipe welding shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of the applicable code, whether ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, ANSI Code for Pressure Piping B31, or such state or local requirements as may supersede codes mentioned above.

O. Before any pipe welding is performed, submit a copy of the welding procedure specifications together with proof of its qualification as outlined and required by the most recent issue of the code having jurisdiction. Submittal shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.1/B31.9.

P. Before any operator shall perform any pipe welding, also submit the operator's qualification record in conformance with provisions of the code having jurisdiction, showing that the operator was tested and certified under the Procedure Specification as before mentioned. Submittal shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.1/B31.9.




Q. Assume responsibility for the quality of welding done and repair or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications.

R. In addition, all pipe welding procedures and procedures for qualification of pipe welding operators shall comply with the requirements of the American Welding Society.

S. Cut weld test plugs at locations selected at random by the Architect. The test plugs shall be tested by the testing agency approved for this project. Failure of the test plugs to meet the standards of the specified codes and agencies shall result in the complete removal and replacement of the joint and retesting of the operator who performed the welding. The removal and replacement of the joints shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

T. Pipe Schedule: Pipe for the various services shall be as follows:

Service Material Schedule Chilled Water & Dual Temperature Water

Steel 40 or standard

Condenser Water Steel 40 or standard

2.02 MECHANICAL PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Rigid Mechanical pipe couplings similar to Victaulic QuickVic™ 107H may be used at this sections option for the following above ground services. 1. Mechanical couplings are permitted only in chilled water and condenser water systems

where exposed (such as in mechanical equipment rooms) and outdoors.

B. Grooved couplings with reverse angle pads shall engage and lock in place the grooved or shouldered pipe, pipe fittings and grooved end valves in a positive watertight couple. QuickVicTM couplings shall be AInstallation Ready@ stab-on design, for direct Astab@ installation onto roll grooved pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts.

C. Grooved couplings shall consist of two places of ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron with reverse angle pads. Coupling gaskets shall be a Grade AEHP@ or AE@ EPDM synthetic rubber, red or green color coded with a central cavity pressure responsive design, or other grades suitable for the intended service. 1. Flexible type couplings shall be used in seismic areas and locations stress relief and

vibration attenuation are required. Flexible couplings shall be Victaulic Style 177 QuickVicTM or Style 77 standard.

D. Coupling assembly shall be securely held together by two track-head, oval-neck, steel bolts. Bolts and nuts shall be heat-treated carbon steel and shall be in accordance with ASTM A-183-60 and A-449. Coupling on outdoor piping shall have galvanized bolts and nuts.

E. AGS grooved mechanical couplings 14" through 60" shall consist of two ASTM A536 ductile iron housings cast with a wide key profile and flat bolt pads for metal-to-metal contact, designed to fit into a deeper, wedge-shaped groove; wide-width synthetic rubber Grade AE@ EPDM gasket of a FlushSeal7 design, and plated steel bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style W07 (rigid) and Style W77 (flexible).




F. All pipe fittings used in connection with pipe couplings shall have grooved or shouldered ends and shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395 Grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536 Grade 65-45-12, forged carbon steel conforming to ASTM A-234 Grade WPB, or fabricated carbon steel from ASTM-A-53 standard wall.

G. Grooved couplings and fittings for copper tubing shall be used on hard drawn ASTM B-88 copper tubing. Grooved couplings and fittings shall be copper tubing sized. Flaring of pipe ends to IPS dimensions will not be permitted. 1. Grooved fittings shall be wrought copper per ASTM B75 or B152 and ANSI B16.22, or

bronze sand casting per ASTM B584-87 copper alloy CDA 836 per ANSI B16.18. Fittings shall be copper tubing sized. (Flaring of pipe ends to IPS dimensions will not be permitted.

2. Grooved couplings shall be ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron, coated with copper colored alkyd enamel. Coupling housings shall be angle-pattern bolt pad type to provide system rigidity. Couplings shall be copper tubing sized. Coupling gaskets shall be grade AEMP@ EPDM, UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 for potable water service. Couplings shall be AInstallation Ready@ stab-on design, for direct Astab@ installation onto roll grooved copper tube without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. Victaulic Stule 607 QuickVicTM.

H. Before assembly of couplings, lubricate the gasket exterior including the lips and/or pipe ends housing interiors, to prevent pinching the gasket. Lubrication shall assist proper gasket seating and alignment while easing installation. Petroleum based lubricants must not be used on Grade "E" or Grade "M" gaskets. Lubricant shall be supplied by, or approved for use with the gasket, by the coupling manufacturer.

I. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

J. Pipes, fittings, BFV's, check valves, plug valves and strainers shall be provided with groove or shouldered ends in accordance with coupling manufacturers latest published literature. Flanged or threaded end valves may be used with grooved adapters.

K. Couplings and fitting shall be designed for a system pressure specified elsewhere and in conformance with manufacturer's published data.

L. Entire coupling installation shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's latest published literature.

M. After completion of pipe coupling installation, Contractor shall furnish to the Owner's representative a signed certificate of compliance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

N. Couplings shall be standard weight as a minimum requirement.

O. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a single, ISO 9001 certified, manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

P. Install the Victaulic AGS piping system in accordance with the latest Victaulic installation instructions. Use Victaulic grooving tools with AGS roll sets to groove the pipe. Follow Victaulic guidelines for tool selection and operation. Coupling installation shall be complete when visual metal-to-metal contact is reached. AGS products shall not be installed with standard




grooved end pipe or components. Installing AGS products in combination with standard grooved end products could result in joint separation and/or leakage.

Q. A Victaulic factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training to contractor=s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. Factory-trained field representative shall periodically review product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

2.03 FITTINGS

A. Fittings shall be specified under "Fitting Schedule" for various services.

B. Welding fittings shall be of the same material and schedule as the pipe to which they are welded. Welding elbows shall be long radius pattern unless clearance conditions necessitate the use of standard radius pattern. Welding fittings shall be as made by Tube-Turn.

C. Fittings shall be of material conforming to the following schedule: Steel Welding Fittings ASTM A-106 Forged Steel Fittings ASTM A-234 Malleable Iron Fittings ASTM A-197 Ductile Iron Fittings ASTM A-395 & A-536 Cast-Iron Fittings ASTM A-126 Brass Fittings ASTM B-62 Wrought Copper Fittings ASTM B-75 & B-152 Bronze Cast Fittings ASTM B-584 Solder Fittings ASTM B-88

D. All fittings used at expansion loops or bends shall be extra heavy.

E. Cast-iron, malleable-iron and bronze fittings shall be of Crane manufacturer or approved equal.

F. Flanges shall be raised face, of the same weight as the fittings in each service category. All flanges shall be drilled to "US Standard" hex nuts and washers. Bolting shall conform to ASTM 193 Grade B-7, threads Class 7 fit. Nuts shall be semi-finished hexagonal, ANSI B18.2 ASTM A194 Grade 2H. 1. Flange Adapters for grooved end pipe shall be ASTM A-395 and A-536 ductile iron, with

synthetic rubber gasket. (Grade to suit the intended service.) Flange Adapters shall be CL 150, Victaulic Style 741.

G. Unions - Unions 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed. Unions 22 inches and larger shall be flanged. Screwed unions on steel pipe, unless otherwise specified, shall be of malleable iron with bronze ground seats suitable for 300 pounds W.S.P. Screwed unions on copper or brass pipe shall be brass, ground joint suitable for 300 pounds W.S.P. Flanged unions shall be malleable iron for steel pipe, and brass for copper or brass pipe, gasket type suitable for 150 pounds W.S.P. If grooved mechanical pipe couplings are used, additional unions are not required. Couplings shall serve as unions. Unions shall be as manufactured by Crane or approved equal.




H. Union shall not be used on high temperature hot water piping. Bolts for high temperature hot water piping shall be alloy steel studs threaded full length and fitted with two hexagon nuts per stud for all flanged joints.

I. Gaskets used on high temperature hot water systems shall be Flexitallic spiral-wound type and shall be certified for use in HTHW systems. Gasket pressure and temperature ratings shall exceed the operating conditions of the HTHW system in which they are being installed.

J. Brass pipe threads shall be cut with special brass treading dies, and the joints shall be made up with lubricant. Strap wrenches, or equivalent, shall be used in making up brass pipe. Wrenches which gouge or scar the pipe will not be used.

K. Solder for each solder-type fitting shall be of 95% tin and 5% antimony or silver solder, as specified herein. Refrigerant piping joints shall be made with silver solder.

L. Unless otherwise specified, all flanged joints shall be fitted with Manville or equal ring gaskets designed for the intended service.

M. Fitting Schedule: Fittings for the various services shall be as follows:

Service Size Material Weight Type Chilled Water and Dual Temperature Water

2" & Below 22" & Above

CI Steel DI

125# Sch. 40

Screwed Welding Grooved

Condenser Water 2" & Below 22" & Above

CI Steel DI

125# Sch. 40

Screwed Welding Grooved

2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide necessary structural members, hangers and supports of approved design to keep piping in proper alignment and prevent transmission of injurious thrusts and vibrations. In all cases where hangers, brackets, etc., are supported from metal decking and/or concrete construction, care shall be taken not to weaken decking and/or concrete or penetrate waterproofing. All hangers and supports shall be capable of screw adjustment after piping is erected. Hangers supporting piping expanding into loops, bends and offsets shall be secured to the building structure in such a manner that horizontal adjustment perpendicular to the run of piping supported may be made to accommodate displacement due to expansion. All such hangers shall be finally adjusted, both in the vertical and horizontal direction, when the supported piping is hot, or chilled, as required. Hangers in direct contact with copper or brass pipe shall be solid copper.

B. Pipe hangers shall be the clevis and pipe roll types, except where otherwise noted.




PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE

Pipe Type of Hanger

Make and Model

Grinnell Fig. m

B-Line Fig. m

Carpenter & Paterson Fig.

m 2" & smaller (steel) Clevis Hanger 260 B3100 100 2" & smaller (copper)

Adjustable Wrought Iron CT-65 B3104CT 100 CT

22" to 4" (steel) Adjustable Steel Yoke Pipe Roll

181 B3110 140

22" to 4" (copper) Adjustable Swivel Ring CT-69 B3170CT 5" & above Two Rod Roller Hanger 171 B3114 142

C. Beam clamps - Hangers supported from floor steel shall be approved I beam clamps. I beam clamps for hangers shall be wrought steel. B-Line Fig. B3055 (C&P Fig. m 268) or equal.

D. Where piping is run near the floor and not hung from the ceiling construction but is supported from the floor, such supports shall be of pipe standards with base flange and adjustable top yoke similar to B-Line Fig. B3091 (C&P Fig. 247) or equal.

E. All vertical piping shall be anchored by means of heavy steel clamps securely bolted or welded to the piping, and with end extension bearing on the building.

F. All vertical piping shall be guided at each floor by use of clamps fastened to building structure. Provide 360E protective saddle at guides. Saddles shall be fastened to pipe or insulation.

G. Vertical runs of pipe not over 15 feet long shall be supported by hangers placed not over one foot from the elbows on the connecting horizontal runs.

H. Vertical runs of pipe over 15 feet long but not over 60 feet long and not over 6 inches in size, or not over 30 feet long and not over 12 inches in size, shall be supported on heavy steel clamps. Clamps shall be bolted tightly around the pipes and shall reset securely on the building structure without blocking. Clamps shall be welded to the pipes or placed below couplings. Clamps shall be B-Line Fig. B3373 or equal.

I. For all insulated piping, provide "Insulshield" as made by Insulcoustic Corp. or pipe covering protection shield B-Line Fig. B3151 (C&P Fig. 265P) with steel shield min. 9 inches long, with vapor barrier jacket. For steam, condensate, hot fuel oil and hot-water heating piping 2 inches and smaller, same as above. For steam, condensate and hot-water heating and high temperature hot water piping 22 inches and larger, provide steel pipe covering protection saddles B-Line Fig. B3160 (C&P Fig. 353 series).

J. Hanger rods shall be of the following diameters:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Max. Spacing

13 inch & below d inch 6'-0"

12 and 2 inch d inch 10'-0" (copper 8'-0")




Pipe Size Rod Diameter Max. Spacing

22 inch 3 inch

2 inch 10'-0" (copper 8'-0")

4 inch 5 inch

e inch 12'-0"

6 inch : inch 12'-0"

8 inch & above f inch 12'-0"

K. Hanger rods shall be attached to preset concrete inserts with steel reinforcing rod through the insert and both ends hooked over the reinforcing mesh. For pipes 4 inches and larger, rods shall extend through concrete slab above where they shall be attached to steel bearing plates 6" x 6" x 3".

L. All trapeze pipe supports shall be constructed of angle iron or C-channel. Uni-strut type supports are acceptable only for medical gas piping. Insulated refrigerant piping may be supported using strut type supports as long as AP Armaflex insulation is used and the strut clamp is a Series 72 AKlo-Shure@ by Hydra-Zorb which is intentionally oversized to match the O.D. of the insulation and includes a plastic clamp collar insert. All angle iron supports located outdoors (trapeze supports or vertical components) shall be of galvanized or stainless steel, including all related support rods and hardware.

M. Piping shall not be hung from other piping, ducts, conduits or from equipment of other trades and no vertical expansion shields will be permitted. Hanger rods shall not pierce ducts.

N. All water piping connected to rotating equipment within all mechanical spaces shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration hangers inserted in the hanger rods. The vibration hangers shall consist of a steel spring in combination with a double deflection neoprene element within a rectangular steel housing. Combined static deflection shall be 1.375" minimum. Hangers shall have capability of supporting the piping at a fixed elevation during installation and shall incorporate an adjusting device to transfer the load to the spring. Deflection shall be indicated by means of scale. Vibration hangers shall be type PCDNHS made by Mason Industries. Provide flexible pipe connectors at all pump suction and discharge piping.

O. Where additional steel is required for the support of hangers, furnish and install same subject to the approval of the Architect. Piping and ductwork shall not be supported from concrete slab construction at ceiling.

P. All piping running on walls shall be supported by means of hanger suspended from heavy angle iron wall brackets. No wall hooks will be permitted.

Q. Lateral bracing of horizontal pipe shall be provided where required to prevent side sway or vibration. The lateral bracing shall be of a type approved by the Architect and shall be installed where directed by the Architect.

R. All heavy piping is defined as follows: 1. individual pipes having a nom. dia. greater than 12 inches. 2. groups of pipes consisting of more than three 8 inch, or more than two 10 inch nom. 1 dia.

pipes,




3. Any combination of closely spaced pipes weighing more than the equivalent of above or 15 lb. per lin. ft., shall be supported at all cross points with overhead floor beams by fastening to the flange of such beams with steel clamps or other suitable means.

S. Where such heavy piping runs parallel with the floor beams properly designed auxiliary steel must be provided. The spacing of such auxiliary steel supports shall in no case be greater than the spacing of the floor beams running perpendicular to the corrugations of the permanent slab steel forms.

T. Assume the responsibility for the proper transfer of the loads of the piping systems to the structure. No additional cost to the Owner should be expected for any corrective work during construction.

U. Rigid type grooved mechanical couplings shall be complete with reverse-angle bolt pads to meet support and hanging requirements corresponding to ANSI B31.1, B31.9, and NFPA 13.

2.05 ANCHORS

A. All anchors shall be separate and independent of all hangers, guides, and supports. Anchors shall be of heavy blacksmith construction suitable in every way for the work approved by the Architect. Anchors shall be welded to the pipe and fastened to the structure with bolts.

B. Anchors shall be fabricated and assembled in such a form as to secure the piping in a fixed position. They shall permit the line to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored points; and shall be so arranged as to be structurally suitable for particular location, and line loading. Submit calculations and details for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall examine location where the piping is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of piping with other components of systems.

B. Provide and erect in a workmanlike manner, according to the best practices of the trade, all piping shown on the Drawings or required to complete the installation intended by these Specifications.

C. The Drawings indicate schematically the size and location of piping. Piping shall be set up and down and offset to meet field conditions and to provide adequate maintenance room and headroom in the Mechanical Rooms.




D. Study the General Construction Specifications and Plans, of the exact dimension of finished work and of the height of finished ceilings in all rooms where radiation, units, equipment or pipes are to be placed and arrange the work in accordance with the Schedule of Interior Finishes, as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.

E. All piping shall be run perpendicular and/or parallel to floors, interior walls, etc. Piping and valves shall be grouped neatly and shall be run so as to avoid reducing headroom or passage clearance. Provide min. 7'-6" headroom under passageway in mechanical equipment room. All valves, controls and accessories concealed in furred spaces and requiring access for operation and maintenance shall be arranged to assure the use of a minimum number of access doors.

F. All pipe lines made with screwed fittings must be provided with sufficient number of flanges or unions to enable the removal of piping without breakage of fittings.

G. All piping shall be erected as to insure a perfect and noiseless circulation throughout the system. No bull head tees will be permitted.

H. All valves and specialties shall be placed so as to permit easy operation and access.

I. Provide proper provision for expansion and contraction in all portions of pipe work, to prevent undue strains on piping or apparatus connected therewith. Provide signed and sealed pipe expansion calculations by an independent, licensed NYS Professional Engineer to substantiate all such provisions for said expansion and contraction. These calculations shall be based on the piping shop drawings. Provide double swings at riser transfers and other offsets wherever possible, to take up expansion. Arrange riser branches to take up motion of riser.

J. Approved bolted, gasketed, flanges (screwed or welded) shall be installed at all apparatus and appurtenances, and wherever else required to permit easy connection and disconnection. Screwed unions shall be used on piping 2" or less.

K. All piping connections to coils and equipment shall be made with offsets provided with screwed or welded bolted flanges arranged so that the equipment can be serviced or removed without dismantling the piping.

L. If, after plant is in operation, any coils or other apparatus are stratified or air bound (by vacuum or pressure), they shall be repiped with new approved and necessary fittings, air vents, or vacuum breakers at no extra cost. If connections are concealed in furring, floors, or ceilings, the Contractor shall bear all expenses of tearing up and refinishing construction and finish, leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed.

M. Fittings shall be of the eccentric reducing type, where changes of size occur in horizontal piping to provide for proper drainage or venting. Steel pipe bends shall be made of the very best grade open hearth, low carbon steel, leaving a smooth uniform exterior and interior surface. Pipe bends shall be made with seamless steel pipe, having a minimum radius of not less than five (5) pipe diameters.

N. Tubing shall be erected neatly in a workmanlike manner. Bends in soft copper tubing benders to prevent deformation of the tubing in the bends. Approved seat-to-pipe threaded adapters shall be provided for junctions with valves and other equipment having threaded connections.




O. Vertical sections of main risers shall be constructed of pipe lengths welded together. No couplings shall be used.

P. The ends of all pipe and nipples shall be thoroughly reamed to the full inside diameter of the pipe and all burrs formed in the cutting of the pipes shall be removed.

Q. Piping shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping.

R. All piping shall be concealed above furred ceilings in rooms where such ceilings are provided (except where specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings, or in walls or partitions, except as otherwise indicated).

S. Piping, fittings or valves of dissimilar materials shall be connected with dielectric connectors as made by Ebco Company or approved equal.

T. Piping at all equipment and valves shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in the connected equipment and valves. Piping shall be sufficiently supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without causing excessive stress or damage to the remaining piping, vales or equipment, without requiring additional supports after these items are removed.

U. Pipe nipples - Any piece of pipe 3" in length and less shall be considered a nipple. All nipples with unthreaded portion 12" and less shall be extra heavy. Only shoulder nipples shall be used. No close nipples will be permitted.

V. Screw threads shall be cut clean and true; screw joints made tight without caulking. No caulking will be permitted. A non-hardening lubricant shall be used. No bushings shall be used. Reductions, otherwise causing objectionable water or air pockets, to be made with eccentric reducers or eccentric fittings.

W. Pitch water piping upward one inch per 100 feet in direction of flow to ensure adequate flow without air binding, and to prevent noise and water hammer. Pitch drain piping c inch per foot in the direction of flow. Branch connections to mains are to be made in such a manner as to prevent air trapping and permit free passage of air. To meet job conditions, mains shall set up to maintain headroom, and clear other trades. Provide oversized float operated automatic air vent (with valve). Avoid 90 E. lift set-ups in supply lines by using 45 degree ells. Where 90 E. lifts exceed 12" install automatic air vent in supply lines. All lifts in return lines shall be installed with automatic air vents. Pipe outlet of all automatic air vents to an open sight drain if the vent is concealed, or to within two feet of the floor within machine rooms. All water piping shall pitch back to low points for drainage. Low points shall be provided with capped : inch hose cocks.

X. Provide drain valves at the heel of all interior main water risers. Provide capped drain valves at the heel of all perimeter water risers.

Y. Miscellaneous drains, vents, reliefs, and overflows from tanks, equipment, piping, relief valves, pumps, etc., shall be run to the nearest open sight drain or roof drain. Provide capped drain valves whenever required for complete drainage of piping, including the system side of all pumps.




Z. Provide domestic water connections from valved outlets to any equipment requiring same.

AA. All drain piping from condensate drain pans shall be properly trapped in accordance with the static pressures involved. Provide cleanout at first change in direction or before the trap. Condensate drain piping sizes shall be not less than 12" except that fan coil unit drains may be 1”.

BB. Vent piping from the high temperature hot water system shall comply with all requirements of high temperature hot water piping specified hereinbefore. This shall also apply for the high temperature water safety valve discharge piping.

CC. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.

DD. Contractor shall utilize a Smog-Hog (or similar) type local exhaust system vented to the outdoors, when welding steel pipe and/or soldering pipe inside the building.


A. Upon completion of installation of piping (partial or complete) test piping to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning piping, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace piping which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. Refer to Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing.




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260512-1

SECTION 260512

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to the best available standards at the scale required.

C. Power systems riser diagrams, as well as schematic diagrams, generally indicate connections to be used for various systems and equipment. Systems conduit and wiring shall be as required for the actual systems installed on this Project. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to secure the provisions of all material, labor, equipment, and services necessary to install complete, tested, and ready for operation the Electrical Systems in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. All systems shall be complete with all necessary appurtenances and minor auxiliaries, including pull boxes, offsets to clear interferences, and supports which are not shown but are needed to make each system complete in every respect. All work described in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice versa, shall be furnished in complete working order. If mention has been omitted of any item of work or material, necessary for completion of the system, then such items must be and are hereby included. The scope of work shall include, but not limited to: 1. Power distribution system – 208 and 480 Volt, Distribution Switchboards. 2. Raceways and installation components. 3. Wire and Cable. 4. Grounding system in conformance with applicable codes. 5. Wiring devices. 6. Existing Lighting fixtures protection and relocation only. 7. Furnishing and setting of all sleeves through the floors and wall, where required including

waterproofing and fireproof sealing and cap flashing. 8. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the fire resistance rating of any rated

wall, ceiling or floor for which his work partially or fully penetrates. Work which could potentially penetrate or breach a rated wall, ceiling or floor include, but are not limited to flush-mounted recessed panel boards, conduit and pipe, ducts, equipment, supports or reinforcements. For any such situation, the Contractor shall provide the necessary fire stopping material, insulation or system in order to maintain the fire rating of the wall, ceiling or floor. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the building construction drawings, including those of the architectural and structural trades, in order to determine the fire resistance ratings for the walls, floors and ceilings for which their work will partially or fully penetrate.

9. All concrete work for pads (including housekeeping pads).




10. Providing temporary rental generators during construction when existing emergency generators are off line and for testing the installation after work is complete.

11. Hardware, such as inserts, bolts, etc., associated with concrete pads. 12. Cutting and core drilling associated with electrical work. 13. Prime painting, where required for electrical equipment and installation. 14. Removal of existing electrical work in accordance with Architectural Demolition Scheme

or as directed and required. Restoration of electrical service in affected adjoining areas which are to continue to function.

15. Provision for temporary light and power. 16. Paying all fees as required by governing agency and performing all testing as required by

governing agency and adjusting and furnishing all certificates of approval, and those of Underwriters.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. The following items of materials and labor will be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications and shall be excluded from the work to the furnished by this Contractor: 1. Rough and finish patching.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS

A. The complete installation shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements and standards of National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Electrical Code (NEC), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), American National Standard Institute (ANSI), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), National Electrical Safety Code, Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), Factory Insurance Association (FIA), National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation", Local Inspection Agency, Local Power Company, Local Telephone Company, along with state and local municipal codes and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Any items or requirements noted in the Specifications or on Drawings, which conflict with these shall be referred to the Architect for decision. All work necessary to comply with these requirements shall be performed by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.

B. All electrical equipment, materials and appliances shall have the listing of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear labels attesting to UL listing, and types approved by Municipal Departments having jurisdiction.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or that of another contractor.

B. Submit shop drawings complete in every detail for items as described in the Contract Documents, or as may be required by the Architect.

C. Submit shop drawings as indicated in subsequent Sections of this Specification.




1.06 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS ON PREMISES

A. Before submitting his bid, this Contractor shall visit the site of the work and shall thoroughly familiarize himself with the observable existing conditions affecting the work. No additional compensation will be granted on account of extra work made necessary by the Contractor's failure to investigate such existing conditions. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions and clearances at the site.

B. Examine all work prepared by others to receive the work of this Section and report any discrepancies and/or defects affecting installation to the General Contractor for correction. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others.

C. Existing conditions, equipment, material, and sizes are shown for reference only. Verify existing conditions and bring any discrepancies to Architect's attention in writing prior to submission.

1.07 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect, remove and/or relocate electrical material, equipment, devices, components, and other work noted and required by demolition or alterations in existing construction.

B. Provide new material and equipment required for relocated equipment.

C. Remove conductors from existing raceways to be rewired. Clean raceways as required prior to rewiring.

D. Tape both ends of abandoned conductors, and cap outlets and abandoned raceways.

E. Cut and cap abandoned floor raceways flush with concrete floor or behind walls and ceilings.

F. Dispose of removed raceways and wiring.

G. Dispose of removed electrical equipment as directed.

H. All electrical work in adjoining areas which is indicated on the Drawings to continue to function but is affected by demolition work shall be reconnected and restored to present function as part of the electrical system of the Buildings.

I. Connect new work to existing work in a neat and acceptable manner, with minimum interference to existing facilities.

J. Maintain continuous operation of existing facilities affected by the work.

K. Alarm and emergency systems are to be interrupted only with the written consent of the Owner.

L. Temporary shutdowns when required, to be made only with written consent of Owner at times not to interfere with normal operations.

M. Where indicated on the Drawings or required by the alteration scheme, the Contractor shall remove all electrical outlets, switches, and other devices, complete with associated wiring, conduit, etc., from partitions, walls, and floors that are to be removed. When the removal of these makes dead electrical wiring that is to remain, Contractor shall install junction boxes or other devices necessary to make the circuits affected continuous and ready for operation. Otherwise,




wiring shall be removed back to the nearest electrical outlet box that is to remain, or to the panelboard.

N. All raceways which become exposed beyond finished surfaces because of the alteration work shall be removed and rerouted behind finished surfaces.

O. Wiring that is to be removed as a result of demolition work, but is required to continue to function, shall be interrupted at convenient locations, rerouted (new wiring and conduits) and reconnected for continuation of their original function. New wiring extensions shall match existing ones in all respects, conductor ampacity, conduit size, etc.

1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The work of this Section shall be coordinated with the work of all other Contracts and shall be so arranged that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of each respective work wherein it may be interrelated with that of this Contract so that generally all construction work can proceed in its natural sequence without unnecessary delay. All communications of a coordinating nature to the Architect shall be via the Construction Manager or General Contractor.

B. Examine all Architectural, Structural, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Sprinkler and Plumbing Drawings relating to this Project, and verify all governing conditions at the site and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required and its relation to other work in the building. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished for work to be done.

C. Scaled and figured dimensions with respect to the items are approximate only; sizes of equipment have been taken from typical equipment items of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work, the Contractor shall carefully check all dimensions and sizes and shall assume full responsibility for the fitting-in of equipment and materials to the building and to meet architectural and structural conditions.

D. Coordinate work with other disciplines. Confer with other contractors whose work might affect this installation; and arrange all parts of this work and equipment in proper relation to the work and equipment of others, with the building construction and with architectural finish so that this work will harmonize in service, appearance, and function.

E. Exposed piping shall be installed to provide the maximum amount of headroom but in no case shall piping be installed less than seven feet (8'-0") above the finished floor. Piping installed in areas where hung ceilings or other furred spaces are indicated shall be installed concealed.

F. The Contractor is referred to the Architectural Drawings for locations and types of hung ceilings and furred spaces.

1.09 INSPECTION AND TESTS

A. At the time of the final inspection and tests, all connections at the switchboards and all splices, etc., must have been completed. Each entire wiring system must test free from short circuits and grounds. When wiring systems are "megger" tested, the insulation resistance between conductors and between conductors and grounds, based on maximum load, shall not be less than that required by National Electrical Code and local authorities having jurisdiction. A written record of all test




data shall be supplied to the Architect (five copies). The tests shall cover but not be limited to the following: 1. Electrical distribution system. 2. Any part of the work called for in the Specifications, or Drawings and as designated by the

Architect or Engineers.

B. Provide all necessary testing equipment, instruments, and skilled personnel for the tests. If in the opinion of the Architect, the results of such tests show that the work has not complied with the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings, the Contractor shall make all additions or changes necessary to put the system in proper working condition and shall pay for all the expenses and for all subsequent tests which are necessary to determine whether the work is satisfactory. Any additional work or subsequent tests shall be carried out at the convenience of the Owner, prior to final payment.

1.10 PERMITS, CERTIFICATES AND FEES

A. Obtain and deliver a final Certificate of Approval from the applicable inspection authority having jurisdiction. Make delivery to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner upon completion of the work and before final payment. Pay all charges made by the inspection authority and include their cost in the bid.

B. This work shall include the procurement of and payment for all permits, certificates and fees for the performance of the electrical work in compliance with codes, applicable laws and municipal regulations including those from local utilities for services.

1.11 PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE AND PRODUCT HANDLING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical equipment shall be delivered and stored at the site, properly packed and crated until finally installed. Store materials in spaces as designated by the General Contractor. Investigate each space through which equipment must be moved. If necessary, equipment shall be shipped from manufacturer in crated sections of size suitable for moving through restricted spaces.

B. Uninstalled and installed equipment and materials shall be adequately protected against loss or stealing; damage caused by water, paint, fire, plaster, moisture, acids, fumes, dust or other environmental conditions; or physical damage, during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions. This Contractor shall replace any damage or stolen material without extra cost to the Owner.

C. Provide effective protection for all material and equipment against damage that may be caused by environmental conditions. Do no work when conditions of temperature in area or moisture on materials or substrates are not in accordance with material manufacturer's recommended conditions for installation.

D. This Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all equipment and systems installed, until final acceptance by the Architect and the Owner. The Operation of the equipment by the Owner does not constitute an acceptance of the work. Work will be accepted only after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment, demonstrated that it fulfills the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and has furnished all required certificates.




E. This Contractor shall guarantee in writing to the Owner that all work installed by him shall be free of defects in workmanship and materials and that all apparatus will develop the capacities and characteristics as indicated, and that, if during a period of one year from date of final approval of work by the Architect, any defects in workmanship, materials or performance appear, he will remedy them without any cost to the Owner. Guarantee requirements shall consist of the aforementioned and other requirements, as established under applicable Contract Documents.

F. Provide effective protection against damage for all material and equipment during shipment, and storage at the Project Site. Cover all stored equipment to exclude dust and moisture. Place stored conduit on dunnage with appropriate weather cover and caps on exposed ends.

G. After cabinets and boxes are installed, cover openings to prevent entrance of water and foreign materials. Close conduit openings with temporary metal or plastic caps, including those terminated in cabinets.

H. Protect all rough and finished floors and other finished surfaces from damage which may be caused by construction materials and methods. Protect floors with tarpaulins, chip pans and oil-proof floor covering. Protect finished surfaces from welding and cutting splatters with baffles and asbestos splatter blankets. Protect finished surfaces from paint droppings, adhesive and other marring agents with drop cloths. Protect other surfaces with appropriate protective measures.

I. Have materials delivered to site. Unload and store materials in designated location, and protect from damage. Deliver materials to their point of installation.

J. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's name and product identification clearly marked thereon.

1.12 ACCESSIBILITY AND MEASUREMENTS

A. All work shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the plans may be made to accomplish this, subject to the approval or the Architect or Engineers.

B. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the Building, and shall be responsible for the correctness of same as related to the work under this Contract.

1.13 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. Electric services for temporary light and power shall be obtained from the nearest existing panelboard and extended as required. Consult the Owner prior to making any connections to existing services.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain the temporary lighting and power system for all Contractors in the area of work. The use of electricity shall be kept to a minimum.

C. The Owner or Owner's Representative will pay for all energy required by the temporary lighting and power system.

D. Provide all wiring, supports, lamp sockets, receptacle sockets and any other materials, supplies or equipment necessary for temporary light and power system.




E. Ground fault protection required by OSHA for temporary receptacle circuits shall be accomplished by providing branch circuit panels containing ground fault protection branch circuit breakers.

F. Provide a grounding conductor connection to each receptacle grounding terminal. Minimum size branch circuit and grounding conductors shall be No. 12 AWG.

G. Install separate stringer circuits for lighting and receptacles. Each lamp socket shall be provided with a 100 watt lamp. Replace burned out lamps as required for as long as the temporary lighting system is maintained in operation.

H. Provide sufficient supplementary temporary lighting to permit proper execution of the work. This supplementary lighting shall consist of but not be limited to the following: 1. Construction hoist landings. 2. Stairways and stairway landings where existing illumination is inadequate due to

alterations or construction. 3. Interior rooms not covered with general construction area lighting.

I. Keep the temporary lighting and power system operational commencing fifteen (15) minutes before the established starting time of that trade which starts work earliest in the morning and ending fifteen (15) minutes after the established quitting time of that trade which stops work latest in the evening. This applies to all weekdays, Monday through Friday inclusive, which are established as regular working days for any trade engaged in the work, and shall continue until Final Acceptance of the work or until these services are ordered terminated by the Owner or the Owner's Representative.

1.14 NAMEPLATES

A. Furnish a nameplate for each equipment enclosure.

B. Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be engraved black phenolic laminate with white letters of uniform size consisting of reasonably large caps, easily visible.

C. Inscriptions shall consist of name and number of equipment as shown on the Drawings and as approved by the Architect.

1.15 NAMES AND TRADE NAMES

A. Where trade and manufacturers' names are specified or indicated on the Drawings, they are intended to indicate the standard of material or articles required. This shall not remove the responsibility of the Contractor from verifying the equipment's compliance with all rules and regulations governing the use of such equipment. No purchase of any equipment shall be done without written authorization, if such equipment will not abide with all rules and regulations, covering its intended use.

1.16 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All material shall be new and of the best quality and shall have the Underwriters Laboratories label attached. The label shall be of the type for the intended application. The work throughout shall be executed in the best and most thorough manner under the direction of, and to the satisfaction of the Architect who will interpret the meaning of the Drawings and Specifications.




The Architect shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in his opinion, is not in full accordance therewith.

B. If, after installation, operation of the equipment proves to be unsatisfactory to the Owner by reason of defects, errors or omissions, the Owner reserves the right to operate equipment until it can be removed from service for correction by Contractor. Contractor shall pay for damages to work of other trades caused by this defective equipment and its replacement.

1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL WORK)

A. Two months prior to the completion of all work and the final inspection of the installation by the Owner, five copies of a complete Instruction Manual, bound in booklet form and suitably indexed, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. All written material contained in the Manual shall be typewritten or printed.

B. The Manual shall contain the following items: 1. Table of Contents 2. Introduction - Explanation of manual and its use. 3. Description of system or equipment.

a. Complete schematic drawings of all systems. b. Functional and sequential description of all systems.

4. Systems Operation a. Operation procedures. b. All posted instruction charts.

5. Maintenance a. Systems trouble-shooting charts b. Procedures for checking out functions. c. Recommended list of spare parts.

6. Listing of Manufacturers 7. Manufacturer's Data (where multiple model, type and size listings are included, clearly and

conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation. a. Description - literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts,

technical data, etc. b. Operation c. Maintenance - including complete trouble-shooting charts d. Parts list e. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of recommended repair and service

companies. f. Guarantee data.

END OF SECTION 260512



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables. 2. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and

data circuits.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire.




3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2 and Type SO.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for armored cable, Type AC metal-clad cable, Type MC Type SO with ground wire.

E. VFC Cable: 1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. 2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, [spiral-wrapped foil

plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire] [dual spirally wrapped copper tape shields and three bare symmetrically applied ground wires], and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

3. Comply with UL requirements for cables in Classes I and II, Division 2 hazardous location applications.

2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Armored cable, Type AC.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Armored cable, Type AC.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Underground feeder cable, Type UF.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Armored cable, Type AC.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Armored cable, Type AC.

F. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

G. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit with braided shield.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.




F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.06 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.07 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.




3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23 - 1

SECTION 260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Multimode optical-fiber cabling. 2. UTP cabling. 3. RS-485 cabling. 4. Low-voltage control cabling. 5. Control-circuit conductors. 6. Identification products.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.




1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches (1520 mm) or less. 2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less. 3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.

2.03 BACKBOARDS

A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

B. Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with flat eggshell latex paint. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

2.04 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden Inc. 2. CommScope, Inc. 3. Corning Incorporated. 4. Emerson Connectivity Solutions. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Mohawk; a division of Belden Inc. 7. Nexans; Berk-Tek Products. 8. Siemon Company (The). 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M. 12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.




B. Description: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive, ]tight-buffer, optical-fiber cable. 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP or Type OFNR in listed riser or plenum

communications raceway. b. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN, Type OFNG, Type OFNP, or

Type OFNR in listed communications raceway. 5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer cable. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to

exceed 40 inches (1000 mm).

2.05 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Corning Incorporated. 5. Dynacom Inc. 6. Hubbell Incorporated. 7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Company (The).

B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,

plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch (900-mm) lengths.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware: 1. Comply with Optical-Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications

of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA-568-C.3. 2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, [Type SC] [Type ST] [Type LC] [Type MT-RJ]

connectors. Insertion loss of not more than 0.75 dB. 3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.




2.06 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. Alpha Wire Company; a division of Belden Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA. 6. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Inc. 8. Nexans; Berk-Tek Products. 9. Siemon Company (The). 10. Superior Essex Inc. 11. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 12. 3M. 13. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP. 1. Comply with ICEA S-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with NEMA WC 66, UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR complying with UL 1666[ and ICEA S-

103-701]. b. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG[; or Type CM,

Type CMG, Type CMP, or Type CMR in listed communications raceways].

2.07 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Dynacom Inc. 5. Hubbell Incorporated. 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Company (The). 10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.




C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch (900-mm) lengths; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure

Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

H. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in multigang faceplate.

I. Faceplates: 1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring

Devices." a. Flush-mounted jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

J. Legend: 1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

2.08 TWIN-AXIAL DATA HIGHWAY CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. 1. Paired, four pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded 7x30tinned-copper conductors. 2. Polypropylene insulation. 3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain

wire. 6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

2.09 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Encore Wire Corporation. 2. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 3. Southwire Company.




B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44.

D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA-568-C.2.

C. Factory test optical-fiber cables according to TIA-568-C.3.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Test cables on receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical-fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical-

fiber flashlight or optical loss test set. 2. Test optical-fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the

cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and

2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep. 2. Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches (102 mm) square

by [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2-1/8 inches (53 mm)] deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch (3.1 mm) of the finished wall surface.

3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.




D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is

installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of the room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits [3 inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension> above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.

B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6,

"Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." 3. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.

Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced. 5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more

than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating.

9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

10. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles. 11. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal

Cabling" unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) at the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry.




D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: 1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

E. Optical-Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.3. 2. Terminate cable on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded

copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches

(127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches (305 mm). c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24

inches (600 mm). 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2

inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6

inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches (305 mm). 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3

inches (75 mm). c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches

(150 mm). 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches (127 mm).

3.04 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.




3.05 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.

3.06 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.07 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-606-A; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with UL 969.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 2. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross-connection.

3. Optical-Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.0.

Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction

according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB.

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.




E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.




GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 3. Foundation steel electrodes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following: a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells

ground rings grounding connections for separately derived systems based on [NETA MTS] [NFPA 70B] <Insert reference>.




1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.03 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.




4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.04 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless [compression] [exothermic]-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: [Copper-clad] [Zinc-coated] [Stainless] steel; [3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m)] [5/8 by 96 inches (16 by 2400 mm)].

B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts. 1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200

mm) long. 2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.




2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6

inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.02 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS

A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator.

3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.




2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.

Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install [tinned ]bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

G. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building. 1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps

to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm)] from building's foundation.

H. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base

of foundation. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor

bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.




1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal[, at ground test wells][, and at individual ground rods]. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 2. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and

installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.




B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.




B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.




3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using

spring friction action for retention in support channel.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).




D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.04 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.




3.05 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05

mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior

ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For wireways and surface raceways and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300 mm) long.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.




2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney. 6. Picoma Industries. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.




G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.02 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 3R and Type 12 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.03 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Prime coated, ready for field painting. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2.04 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney. 12. RACO; Hubbell. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

K. Device Box Dimensions: [4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep)] [4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep)].

L. Gangable boxes are allowed.

M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R Type 12 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

N. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 3R Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.05 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. e. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc.




f. Synertech Moulded Products. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and

Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: concrete encased. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT or RNC. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.

a. Loading dock. b. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.




C. Minimum Raceway Size: [1/2-inch (16-mm)] [3/4-inch (21-mm)] trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew, cast-metal fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:




1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m)intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.




T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.




3.04 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.05 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 44 - 1

SECTION 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement

of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that

products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.




B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Presealed Systems.




2.04 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.05 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Sealant shall have VOC content of ** g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.




4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using [steel] [cast-iron] pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's




wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.

H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, [0.010 inch (0.25 mm)] [0.015 inch (0.38 mm)] thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.




2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.02 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage[ and system or service type].

C. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

F. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.

2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Write-on, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, [0.010 inch (0.25 mm)] [0.015 inch (0.38 mm)] thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.

F. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.




2.04 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Write-on, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.

E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, [0.010 inch (0.25 mm)] [0.015 inch (0.38 mm)] thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer. 2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black

ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

2.05 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.06 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground electrical utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

2.07 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.




C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

2.08 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.09 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.10 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.




B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces: 1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of

a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum intervals.




C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if

authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

G. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

J. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless




otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

M. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

N. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchboards. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Enclosed switches. g. Enclosed circuit breakers. h. Enclosed controllers. i. Variable-speed controllers.




j. Push-button stations. k. Power transfer equipment. l. Contactors. m. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. n. Power-generating units. o. Monitoring and control equipment.




OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY 260572 - 1

SECTION 260572 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.




b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of short-circuit study.


A. Qualification Data: For Short-Circuit Study Specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Short-Circuit Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the following:

1. ESA Inc. 2. Operation Technology, Inc. 3. Power Analytics, Corporation. 4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.

C. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output.

2.02 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.




2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated

short-circuit duties. 3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;

verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the Evaluations.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage.




b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For equipment that is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 5. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated

kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 6. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 7. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or

nonmagnetic).

3.02 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.




C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated

less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Low-voltage switchgear. 3. Control panels. 4. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 5. Branch circuit panelboards. 6. Disconnect switches.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit study.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.




OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1

SECTION 260573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings for selective tripping.

1. Study results shall be used to determine coordination of series-rated devices.

1.03 DEFINITIONS








B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and equipment evaluation reports. 3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in




equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.


A. Qualification Data: For Coordination Study Specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:

1) One-line diagram. 2) Protective device coordination study. 3) Time-current coordination curves.

b. Power system data.



B. Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the following:

1. ESA Inc. 2. Operation Technology, Inc. 3. Power Analytics, Corporation. 4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.




B. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2.02 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS


B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.




c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a


F. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent protective devices when available.

a. Phase and Ground Relays:

1) Device tag. 2) Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup

value. 3) Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

b. Circuit Breakers:

1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground). 2) Adjustable time-current characteristic. 3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. 4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

c. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.

G. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system covered.




2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.

3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device. b. Medium-voltage equipment overcurrent relays. c. Medium- and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total

clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. d. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's

tolerance bands. e. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault

protection curves. f. Cables and conductors damage curves. g. Ground-fault protective devices. h. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points. i. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point. j. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.

5. Series rating on equipment allows the application of two series interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Both devices share in the interruption of the fault and selectivity is sacrificed at high fault levels. Maintain selectivity for tripping currents caused by overloads.

6. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is achieved.

7. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.02 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time intervals.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.





E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated

less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

H. Motor Protection:

1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70. 2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620.

I. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

J. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written recommendations and to IEEE 242.

K. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.




L. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Switchgear. 3. Low-voltage switchgear. 4. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 5. Branch circuit panelboards.

M. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand

short-circuit stresses. 3. Any application of series-rated devices shall be recertified, complying with requirements

in NFPA 70.

3.03 LOAD-FLOW AND VOLTAGE-DROP STUDY

A. Perform a load-flow and voltage-drop study to determine the steady-state loading profile of the system. Analyze power system performance two times as follows:

1. Determine load-flow and voltage drop based on full-load currents obtained in "Power System Data" Article.

2. Determine load-flow and voltage drop based on 80 percent of the design capacity of the load buses.

3. Prepare the load-flow and voltage-drop analysis and report to show power system components that are overloaded, or might become overloaded; show bus voltages that are less than as prescribed by NFPA 70.

3.04 MOTOR-STARTING STUDY

A. Perform a motor-starting study to analyze the transient effect of the system's voltage profile during motor starting. Calculate significant motor-starting voltage profiles and analyze the effects of the motor starting on the power system stability.

B. Prepare the motor-starting study report, noting light flicker for limits proposed by IEEE 141, and voltage sags so as not to affect the operation of other utilization equipment on the system supplying the motor.

3.05 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied in the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and




engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 241 and IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground. 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

8. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

9. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

10. Maximum demands from service meters. 11. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material. 12. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 13. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic). 14. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with

tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.




i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperes rms symmetrical.

k. Identify series-rated interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Obtain device data details to allow verification that series application of these devices complies with NFPA 70 and UL 489 requirements.

3.06 FIELD ADJUSTING

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage the Coordination Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the following:

1. Acquaint personnel in the fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and emergency modes.

2. Hand-out and explain the objectives of the coordination study, study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpreting the time-current coordination curves.

3. Adjust, operate, and maintain overcurrent protective device settings.




OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 1

SECTION 260574 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment.

1.03 DEFINITIONS








B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form. 1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.





A. Qualification Data: For Arc-Flash Study Specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.


A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the equipment manuals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.



B. Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the following: 1. ESA Inc. 2. Operation Technology, Inc. 3. Power Analytics, Corporation. 4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

2.02 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENT


B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.




C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output: 1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the

following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a


F. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Hazard risk category. 8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

G. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

2.03 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis: 1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Flash protection boundary. 4. Hazard risk category. 5. Incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.




C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.02 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.


E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows: 1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following: 1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Switchgear. 3. Low-voltage switchgear. 4. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 5. Branch circuit panelboards.

3.03 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Use the short-circuit study output and the field-verified settings of the overcurrent devices.

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size. 1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and

shall assume no motor load.




2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except 240-V ac and 208-V ac systems fed from transformers less than 125 kVA.

F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match

the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: 1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

3.04 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call

discrepancies to the attention of Architect. 2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action

submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution

system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved

in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.




3. Power sources and ties. 4. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

5. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

6. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

7. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 8. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic). 9. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and

metallic shield performance parameters.

3.05 LABELING

A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and disconnects and for each of the following locations: 1. Motor-control center. 2. Low-voltage switchboard. 3. Switchgear. 4. Medium-voltage switch. 5. Control panel.

3.06 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS

A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash Study Specialist.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the potential arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the arc-flash warning labels.





SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1

SECTION 262413

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.

2. Transient voltage suppression devices.

3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

4. Instrumentation.

5. Control power.

6. Accessory components and features.

7. Identification.

8. Mimic bus.


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully

operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage

suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include

dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required

clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,

equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation

and isolation.

6. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility

company.

7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.





8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;

include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

10. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus.

11. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color

selection.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in

Section 013548 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

C. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include

selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and

type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.





2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

5. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no

fewer than one of each size and type.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and

trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with UL 891.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and connect factory-

installed space heaters to temporary electrical service to prevent condensation.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures

to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:





1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet

work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to

provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with

concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by Eaton

Electrical Inc., Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by one of the following:

1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456817984&mf=04&src=wd






3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Panel mounted.

2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.

3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: 2000 A.

E. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand

seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish

over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

I. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder

sections.

J. Cubical Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each

vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above

expected dew point.

2. Space-Heater Power Source: Transformer, factory installed in switchboard.

K. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

L. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank

compartments.

M. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as

switchboard.

2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism.

3. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily

removable for drilling and cutting.

4. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchboard.

5. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

N. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-

plated.






2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as

through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.

3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) hard-drawn copper of 98 percent

conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground

conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway

ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of

switchboard's main and distribution sections.

5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,

equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus

extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

6. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.

O. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and

appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

P. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or

flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.

Q. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other

components including instruments and instrument transformers.

2.02 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings by Eaton Electrical Inc. Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by

one of the following:

1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in,

solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave

tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating

matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and

accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.

2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.

3. Integral disconnect switch.

4. Redundant suppression circuits.

5. Redundant replaceable modules.

6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.

7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.

9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,

for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of

any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate

with building power monitoring and control system.

10. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2019&mf=04&src=wd








C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase.

D. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges

with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase,

four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.

2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits with high

leg shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, from high leg.

2. Line to Ground: 400 V.

3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

2.03 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to

meet available fault currents.

1. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-

replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity

discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking

ground-fault protection function.

f. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with

functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system

specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

g. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts

mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker

contacts.

B. Bolted-Pressure Contact Switch: Operating mechanism uses rotary-mechanical-bolting action to

produce and maintain high clamping pressure on the switch blade after it engages the stationary

contacts.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2023&mf=04&src=wd





a. Boltswitch, Inc.

b. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

c. Pringle Electrical Manufacturing Company, Inc.

d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Main-Contact Interrupting Capability: Minimum of 12 times the switch current rating.

3. Operating Mechanism: Manual handle operation to close switch; stores energy in

mechanism for opening and closing.

a. Mechanical Trip: Operation of mechanical lever, push button, or other device

causes switch to open.

4. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

D. Fuses are specified in Section 262813 "Fuses."

2.04 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-

wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy

tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.

e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.

f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.

g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.

h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.

i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from

five to 60 minutes.

j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument

compartment door.

2.05 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-

power transformer.

B. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied from remote branch circuit.

2.06 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.










B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and

switchboard class relays.

C. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented steel box or

cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.

2.07 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard. Arrange

in single-line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations consistent with final

mimic-bus diagram.

B. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied.

Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections.

C. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to represent

bus and components, complete with lettered designations.

D. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with

one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or

physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal

thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033053

"Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete

base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.





3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for

switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.

Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic.

Mount on front of switchboards.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and

instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install spare-fuse cabinet.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Section 262500 "Enclosed

Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays

for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, and

specialties.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying

with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter

and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with

requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems."







B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove

front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial

action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent

Protective Device Coordination Study."





3.07 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.08 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and

accessories.




PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Electronic-grade panelboards.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. SPD: Surge Protective Device (name changed in UL 1449 3rd Edition).


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, SPD, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.




B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of




C. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.




C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding [minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C)] [23

deg F (minus 5 deg C)] to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption

of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.




Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. c. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent

protective cover.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.




2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.03 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings of Easton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: CB.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.




2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Trim hinges to box; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

e. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.




f. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. 1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813

"Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: [One] [Two] normally open and normally closed contact(s) that

operate with switch handle operation.

2.06 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.




1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads[ after balancing panelboard loads]; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA





2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.




FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits enclosed switches

enclosed controllers. 2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches

fuseholders. 3. Plug-fuse adapters for use in Edison-base, plug-fuse sockets. 4. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,

local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.



FUSES 262813 - 2

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

two of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.02 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.



FUSES 262813 - 3

2.03 PLUG FUSES

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

2.04 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS

A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base fuseholders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.

2.05 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull. 1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity

minimum. 2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Service Entrance: Class L, fast acting. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.



FUSES 262813 - 4

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.




ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 5. Molded-case switches. 6. Enclosures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.




6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of




C. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.





A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding

104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed

interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:




1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.02 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES


B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.03 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.




C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

E. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 4. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 208-V ac.

2.04 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES


B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts. 4. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped.

2.05 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.





3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.




C. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.




c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."




TEMPORARY GENERATOR DOCKING PORTS 26 32 14-1

SECTION 26 32 14 TEMPORARY GENERATOR DOCKING PORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the work, and Division 01 Specification Sections wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 00 – General Provisions For Electrical Work shall apply

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes regulatory and installation requirements for exterior mounted weatherproof connections for the roll-up generators that are required when emergency power supply is inoperable or under prolonged maintenance with the following features:

1. Cam Lok connections

2. Outdoor enclosure.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 263213 – “Engine Generators” for Emergency Generators and Outdoor Enclosures.

2. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.


A. Product Data: For each port, overcurrent protective device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component.

1. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each port and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Detail short-circuit current rating of ports and overcurrent protective devices.




5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

6. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer

B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Include the following: 1) List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for

ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

2) Operating instructions laminated and mounted adjacent to generator location. 3) Training plan.

B. FIELD CONDITIONS

1. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, shrubbery and structures to provide pathway for moving port into place.

C. COORDINATION

1. Coordinate layout and installation of port and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

2. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

D. WARRANTY

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace port enclosures, buswork, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and factory installed interconnection wiring that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EXTERIOR MOUNTED GENERATOR PORT

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton b. Square D c. General Electric Company d. Seimens

2. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

3. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for port including clearances allowable under the design restrictions between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

4. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

5. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

6. Comply with NFPA 70.

7. Comply with UL 891.

B. For any required manufacturer assistance with testing described or required below for all pre-purchased equipment, coordinate with owner to engage the manufacturer of said equipment.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V

D. Main-Bus Continuous: 1200 A.

E. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R.

1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's custom color to match the exterior color of the building; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.


A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with to meet available fault currents.

1. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a) Instantaneous trip. b) Long- and short-time pickup levels. c) Long and short time adjustments. d) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared t response.

2. MCCB Features and Accessories:




a) Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b) Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material. c) Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. d) Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking

ground-fault protection function. e) Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at [55] [75]

percent of rated voltage. f) Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without

intentional time delay. g) Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts

mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

h) Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. The interlock to be keyed the same as the generator mounted circuit breaker.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive Generator Connection Ports for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted equipment with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:




1. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: 1) Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60

days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of port. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

2) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

3) Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Equipment will be considered defective if it do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies each Generator Port and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.




TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 36 00-1

SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the work, and Division 01 Specification Sections wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.

B. Section 01 31 46 – Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.

C. Section 26 05 00 – General Provisions For Electrical Work shall apply

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for non-automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less 1. Section 263213 - "Engine Generators". 2. Section 263214 – “Temporary Generator Docking Ports”


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer-authorized service representative

B. Retain "Seismic Qualification Data" Paragraph below if required by seismic criteria applicable to Project. Not Applicable.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Include the following:

1) List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

2) Operating instructions laminated and mounted adjacent to generator location. 3) Training plan.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Member company of NETA. 2. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate installation with pre-purchased generator enclosure for penetrations into the enclosure and location of the equipment within the enclose so as not to adversely impact the air flow and clearances around the generator.




1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of transfer switch or transfer switch components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 99.

D. Comply with NFPA 110.

E. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

F. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Short-Circuit Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

2.02 NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton 2. Square D 3. General Electric Company 4. Seimens

B. Manual and Electrically Operated: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternative Source." Manual handle provides quick-make, quick-break manual-switching action. Switch shall be capable of electrically or manually transferring load in either direction with either or both sources energized. Control circuit disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

C. Double-Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during switching sequence. 1. Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 2. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated

current between active power sources.




3. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 4. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. 5. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 6. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 7. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 8. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 9. Connectors shall be marked for conductor size and type according to UL 1008.

2.03 . SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment according to UL 1008. Ensure proper operation. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Install unit inside the pre-purchased outdoor generator enclosure. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in Section 013548

Paragraph 1.07.A and Paragraph 3.03.B 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in other sections of the

project manual. 3. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

B. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-

resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

1) Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. 2) Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity

of barriers, covers, and safety features.




3) Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. 4) Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

1) Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

2) Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. 3) Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

1) Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch

11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below.

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.


Date post:	16-Mar-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times